Home

Canon iP4700 series On-screen Manual

1. Meds Type Plan Paper ed 13 Paper Source Atomapeaily Select ar Aigcaton Pre Quality Hah al Qayara Pisan P aper Leter 85x11 215 S275 4am Oo The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust color balance There are individual sliders for Cyan Magenta and Yellow Each color becomes stronger when the corresponding slider is moved to the right and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is Adjusting Color Balance Page 279 of 437 pages moved to the left For example when cyan becomes weaker the color red becomes stronger You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 After adjusting each color click OK Color Aduatnert Matching gt ABCDEF aP 1234567 owes Noma Sample Type rc hegty 0 Oo W o Stardard S ugt Dark View Color Paton ain 5 0 Low Hoh P important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the document is printed with the adjusted color balance P important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Cyan Magenta and Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method gt Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity gt Adjusting Contrast Pag
2. 1 Display the document Display the document to be added to My Manual 2 Click My Manual The My Manual pane is displayed to the left of the on screen manual ES Note Click to close or display the My Manual pane 3 Register the document to My Manual Click Add The title of the currently displayed document is added to List of My Manual E8 Note a You can also add documents to My Manual by the following methods If you add a document to My Manual a yy mark is displayed in the document icons in the contents pane From the Recently Displayed Documents list double click the document title that you want to add to My Manual or select the document and press Enter key to display the title and then click Add Right click the document title displayed in the contents pane or right click the explanation window and then select Add to My Manual from the right click menu Inthe contents pane select the document title that you want to add to My Manual and then click Add to My Manual at the bottom right of the pane Registering Documents to My Manual Page 98 of 437 pages 4 Display My Manual When you double click or select and press Enter a document title displayed in List of My Manual that document is displayed in the explanation window Note To delete a document from List of My Manual select that document title from the list and then click Delete or press Delete Page top Symbols U
3. The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set page layout printing Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver FR ck Senp E Man B Page Setup of Eocts AJ Martenance El Page Sze Letier 85 11 Orton A Poway A Lngcace _ Retate 180 degrees B Pree Pee Sze Later 85x10 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list Setting the layout of two pages of the document from left to right is complete 4 Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order If necessary click Specify specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box and click OK Page Layout Printing Page 239 of 437 pages Page Layout Printing ex Posen Poga Pert re t Page Order ojia k Page Borger CE Gea Gem Ge Pages To increase the number of pages to be included on a single sheet of paper select a desired number of pages from the list You can also set 2 Page Print or 4 Page Print on the Quick Setup tab Page Order To change the page arrangement order select an icon from the list to change the page placement order Page Border To print a page border around each d
4. 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document is converted to grayscale data It allows you to print the color document in monochrome P important a When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked the printer driver processes image data as sRGB data In this case actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data When using the grayscale printing function to print Adobe RGB data convert the data to sRGB data using an application software ES Note Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 268 of 437 pages During Grayscale Printing color inks may be used as well as black ink Page top Specifying Color Correction Page 269 of 437 pages Anad Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction Specifying Color Correction You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed Normally the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed with color tints that most people prefer This method is suitable for printing sRGB data When you want to print by using the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data effectively select ICM When you want to use an application software to specify a printing ICC profile select None The procedure for specifying color c
5. omc PATO eres Print ng Preferences Man B Page Seno of Biocts A _Martenance El Page Sze ketier 85 11 E Orientation A Pora fA Langego F Aetate 189 degoes 4 Portes P Same os Page Sire Page Lagat Noenalsine a E a 3 A Pign Paper Lear 85x11 215 275 dem Nomaisise Borsless FitoPage Scaled PogeLayot a J Opies Prrting Auhomatic Pret Area Setup Rape Sde Long side saping Left v Specty Margin Sons 1 1 993 Pisce tanp over text Rap frst page only E Background Sargie 1 Background frn page only on corel _ Dotnata tp 3 Click Define Stamp The Stamp Settings dialog box opens Registering a Stamp Stamp Settings Not Saved EAZ Roro Placemert Save setings Rare Type Tet Qarp Tee TrueType Fort re Stye Regaer hd Sie 3 gine Color RGB 192 192 192 Select Color 4 Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window e Stamp tab Select Text Bitmap or Date Time User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type e For Text registration the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text If necessary change the TrueType Font Style Size and Outline settings You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color e For Bitmap click Select File and select the bitmap file omp to be used If necessary change the settings of the Size and Transparent whit
6. Reduced printing may affect the layout depending on your document Windows 1 Open the printer properties dialog box sb Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Click Here Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the printer properties dialog box quit the running application software 2 Click Print Area Setup in the Page Setup sheet and select Use reduced printing Mer 1 Open the Print dialog box gt Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh 2 Select Duplex Printing amp Margin in the pop up menu 3 Select Automatic Duplex Printing 4 Click Use reduced printing in Print Area Page top No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 368 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks gt No Printing Results gt Printing Is Blurred ABCD Colors Are Wrong White Streaks No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 369 of 437 pages Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2 Check the status of ink tanks Replace the ink tank if the ink has run out Routine Maintenance Check 3 Is the orange tape or protective film remaini
7. Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning Inside the Printer Cleaning Inside the Printer Perform bottom plate cleaning before you execute duplex printing to prevent smudges on the back side of the paper Also perform bottom plate cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear on the printed page The procedure for performing bottom plate cleaning is as follows Open the printer driver setup window Bottom Plate Cleaning N Click Bottom Plate Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Bottom Plate Cleaning dialog box opens 9 Load paper in the printer As instructed in the dialog box fold the A4 size or Letter size plain paper in half horizontally and then unfold the sheet Load the paper into the rear tray in the portrait orientation with the crest of the crease facing down Perform the bottom plate cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and click Execute Bottom plate cleaning starts Page top Changing the Printer Settings Page 344 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Page top Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Page 345 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Changing Printer
8. Double click Solution Menu on the desktop Click Here Solution Menu acintosh Click S Solution Menu in the Dock The screens below are for Windows Vista Connacht horny 5 a a z D eea Qnm m C e Click the button of a function to use After starting Solution Menu click the button on the title bar to reduce the window size Canon Solution Menu om ik a E I A ES Note Install Solution Menu from the Setup CD ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled To install Solution Menu select Solution Menu in Custom Install The buttons displayed on the screen may vary depending on the country or region of purchase To start Solution Menu from the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Canon Utilities Solution Menu then Solution Menu acintosh To start Solution Menu from the menu bar select the Go menu Applications Canon Utilities Solution Menu then double click Solution Menu m My Printer With My Printer you can display the printer driver setup window It also provides you with the information on how to take an action when you have trouble with the operation My Printer is not available in Macintosh Windows Useful Software Applications Page 25 of 437 pages Double click My Printer on the desktop Canon My Printer ES Note You can also start My Printer from Solution Menu or the taskbar Install My Printer f
9. Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to You can adjust the effect level using the slider Blemish Remover Removes moles You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to OK Applies the selected effect to the specified area Undo Cancels the latest correction enhancement Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections and enhancements Save All Corrected Images Saves all the images that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list Correct Enhance Images Window Page 174 of 437 pages Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Page top Questions and Answers Page 175 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers Easy PhotoPrint EX Questions and Answers How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File m Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from gt How Do Print with Even Margins s What Is C1 or C4 Page top How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File Page 176 of 437 pages AJni Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt How Can Move or Copy the Sa
10. Printing Area Page 410 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area Printing Area To ensure the best print quality the printer allows a margin along each edge of media The actual printable area will be the area inside these margins Recommended printing area HE Canon recommends that you print within this area Printable area I The area where it is possible to print However printing in this area can affect the print quality or the paper feed precision ES Note Borderless Printing e By selecting Borderless Printing option you can make prints with no margins e When performing Borderless Printing slight cropping may occur at the edges since the printed image is enlarged to fill the whole page e For Borderless Printing use the following paper e Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use GP 501 Photo Paper Glossy GP 502 Photo Paper Plus Semi Gloss SG 201 Photo Paper Pro Platinum PT 101 Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP 201 Photo Paper Pro II PR 201 e Matte Photo Paper MP 101 This paper can be used only when printing from your computer Performing Borderless Printing on any other type of paper may substantially reduce printing quality and or result in printouts with altered color hues Borderless Printing on plain paper may result in printouts with reduced quality Use them only for test printing You can perform Borderless Printing on plain paper only when printing from your computer e Borderl
11. 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Print Head Alignment d Ean papu ence ts pan papas en ee ne paang aast Smm Sem re a A drae ably ats hee ragi e ert hatra Lex mera Aboma at aoe peton tom Serg armen pre heed yere Sros de dhgrmart evds prang gat Fa panter nady korad te catie and te Be pomer wrd keni one met of Ai ar iater son Minio Fhoto Papar ME 1D Lyre te aa bay ora aieh Mp Pot Hand Pra cunts f amec pre head dyme ane 33 EAO cefa arus omt To pra aad hah Po aam trg a Fert Agaat Siia The print head alignment pattern will be printed and the printer will adjust the print head position automatically Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the print head alignment pattern This takes about 5 minutes to complete E9 Note f the automatic adjustment of the print head position has failed the Alarm lamp flashes Refer to Eleven flashes of Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide Aligning the Print Head If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above align the Print Head manually Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide To print and check the current head position adjustment values click Print Alignment Value 1 Make sure that the power is turned on Page 68 of 437 pages 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized supplied paper
12. After spectying pacer sae etc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Ste M Doub page abum Onentaton Potrat L Page number Front amp Back Front Cover Back Cover 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Cover Double page album Page number EA Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can select whether to display images on the inside of the front and back covers in the Cover Options dialog box To display the Cover Options dialog box select Front or Front amp Back for Cover and click Options Select the Double page album checkbox to enable the spread page layout consisting of two page master In a double page album you can arrange an image across the left and right pages You can customize the page numbers position font size etc in the Page Number Settings dialog box To display the Page Number Settings dialog box select the Page number checkbox and click Settings You can customize the margins of the front cover inside pages and back cover in the Margin Settings dialog box To display the Margin Settings dialog box click Margins 3 Select the theme you want to use from Theme in Sample Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 118 of 437 pages 4 If you want to change the layout click Layout The Change Layout dialog box appears In the Change Layout dialog box you can change the
13. In this case check Enable bidirectional support check box on both the print server system and the client system e When you print from a client system you cannot use Canon lJ Preview e When the functions on the Maintenance tab cannot be set properly from a client system they may be grayed out In this case change the settings from the print server When you change the settings of the print server you should delete the icon of the shared printer from the client system and then specify the shared settings again in the client system When the Same Printer Driver is Installed in the Print Server System and the Client System as the Local Printer e The net crawl function may automatically create a network printer icon on the client system Page top Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 433 of 437 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Transforming Your Photos into Creative Works of Art Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras You can also print borderless photos easily Start Easy PhotoPrint EX 7 Click Here Easy PhotoPrint EX ES Note See the section below for details on how to use Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing with the Bundled Application Software Create a Personalized Photo Album Creating a personalized photo album is an easy task if you use Easy PhotoPrint EX All yo
14. Q A Page top Page 76 of 437 pages Appendix Page 77 of 437 pages Basic Guide a P Contents gt Appendix Appendix Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Tips on How to Use Your Printer A Page top Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Page 78 of 437 pages Basic Guide E 1 Contents gt Appendix gt Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images It may be unlawful to print the following documents The list provided is non exhaustive When in doubt check with a legal representative in your jurisdiction Paper money Traveler s checks Money orders Food stamps Certificates of deposit Passports Postage stamps canceled or Immigration papers uncanceled Internal revenue stamps canceled or Identifying badges or insignias uncanceled Selective service or draft papers Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness Checks or drafts issued by Stock certificates governmental agencies Copyrighted works works of art without Motor vehicle licenses and permission of copyright owner certificates of title 9 A Page top Tips on How to Use Your Printer Page 79 of 437 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Appendix gt Tips on How to Use Your Printer Tips on How to Use Your Printer This section introduces the tips on how to use your printer and for printing with optimal qua
15. The printer can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high density printing to prevent paper abrasion Check this check box to use this function Align heads manually The Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is normally set to automatic head alignment but you can change it to manual head alignment If the printing results of automatic print head alignment are not satisfactory see Manual Print Head Alignment and perform manual head alignment Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment Ink Drying Wait Time You can set the length of the printer rest time until printing of the next page begins Moving the slider to the right increases the pause time and moving the slider to the left decreases the time If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries increase the ink drying wait time Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing Transmit the settings Click Send and click OK when the confirmation message appears The printer operates with the modified settings hereafter Page top Troubleshooting Page 354 of 437 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an Error Occurs The Printer Cannot Be Powered On Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately s Cannot Install the Printer Driver s gt Cannot Connect t
16. ej m n Prefer gan DR Qsc Senp E Main B Page Setup gf Becta AJ Martenance El Page Sze Lotier 35x117 gt Orientation la Porra A unce a a S v Pign Paper Lomer 85x11 215 279 40 Nomalsize Bordetess FttoPoge Scaled Page Layout m d Prt Area Set im GEESE Ge gt 199 i T Part tore Last Page Collate 7 _ Pact Options Stamp Backgeund __Detauts Gas Gea Goan Geen 3 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the margin width and then click OK gt nes 0 01 2 Detmae Setting the Stapling Margin Page 229 of 437 pages 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width P important Staple Side and Specify Margin appear grayed out and are unavailable when Borderless Poster or Booklet is selected for Page Layout Scaled is selected for Page Layout When Duplex Printing is also selected only Staple Side can be specified Page top Borderless Printing Page 230 of 437 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Borderless Printing Borderless Printing The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that it extends sligh
17. B5 A5 and Letter sizes Plain paper of other page sizes cannot be loaded in the Cassette Load them in the Rear Tray In Macintosh Choukei 3 and Choukei 4 are not available Standard sizes Letter 8 50 x 11 00 inches 215 9 x 279 4 mm Legal 8 50 x 14 00 inches 215 9 x 355 6 mm A5 5 83 x 8 27 inches 148 0 x 210 0 mm A4 8 27 x 11 69 inches 210 0 x 297 0 mm B5 7 17 x 10 12 inches 182 0 x 257 0 mm 4 x 6 4 00 x 6 00 inches 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 4 00 x 8 00 inches 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 5 00 x 7 00 inches 13 x 18 cm 8 x 10 8 00 x 10 00 inches 20 x 25 cm L 3 50 x 5 00 inches 89 0 x 127 0 mm 2L 5 00 x 7 01 inches 127 0 x 178 0 mm Media Types You Can Use Page 40 of 437 pages Hagaki 3 94 x 5 83 inches 100 0 x 148 0 mm Hagaki 2 7 87 x 5 83 inches 200 0 x 148 0 mm Comm Env 10 4 12 x 9 50 inches 104 6 x 241 3 mm DL Env 4 33 x 8 66 inches 110 0 x 220 0 mm Choukei 3 4 72 x 9 25 inches 120 0 x 235 0 mm Choukei 4 3 54 x 8 07 inches 90 0 x 205 0 mm Youkei 4 4 13 x 9 25 inches 105 0 x 235 0 mm Youkei 6 3 86 x 7 48 inches 98 0 x 190 0 mm Card 2 16 x 3 58 inches 55 0 x 91 0 mm Wide 4 00 x 7 10 inches 101 6 x 180 6 mm Non standard sizes You can also specify a custom size within the following range Minimum size 2 17 x 3 58 inches 55 0 x 91 0 mm Rear Tray 5 83 x 8 27 inches 148 0 x 210 0 mm Casse
18. C2 Inside the front cover C3 Inside the back cover C4 Back cover Page top Photo Print Settings Page 180 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings Photo Print Settings gt Printing on a DVD CD s gt Printing Vivid Photos s gt Reducing Photo Noise s gt Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index s gt Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Page top Printing on a DVD CD Page 181 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing on a DVD CD amp Printing on a DVD CD You can print on a DVD CD using Photo Print Select CD R for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen then select a layout and enter the title If you want to edit the details return to Menu and select DVD CD Label and edit print using CD LabelPrint Follow the steps for other items to complete image selection in the Select Images screen Selecting a Photo P important Do not attach the CD R Tray until the message asking you to load the DVD CD is displayed Doing so can damage the printer 1 Select CD R for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen Se
19. However after changing Printer Paper Size confirm that the setting for Page Size on the Page Setup sheet matches the setting set in the software application For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide If you select A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper when Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source the printer feeds the paper from the Cassette If you select other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper the printer feeds the paper from the Rear Tray If you select the wrong page size or media type the printer may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality 3 Click OK m iiag Peters D W nom Sete Dael 6 aite af Dan Al Mertenene Pueg beton prerg ES Note For details on the printer driver functions click Help or Instructions to view the online help or Page 15 of 437 pages Printing Documents Windows Page 16 of 437 pages the on screen manual Advanced Guide The Instructions button appears on the Quick Setup Main and Maintenance sheets if the on screen manual is installed on your computer You can name the changed settings and add to Commonly Used Settings For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide If the Always Print with Current Settings check box is selected the current settings will be applied from the next print job onward Some software applications may not have this function To display the preview to
20. Page top Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Printer Page 329 of 437 pages ASAT Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer gt Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Printer Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Printer If protrusions inside the printer are stained wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like P important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the printer Page top Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page 330 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Print Heads s gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position gt Manual Print Head Alignment b Checking the Print Head Nozzles gt Cleaning Inside the Printer Page top Cleaning the Print Heads Page 331 of 437 pages Velieirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Print Heads The print head cleaning function allows you to unclog clogged nozzles in the print head Perform print head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print even though there is enough ink The procedure for cleaning the print heads is as follows Cleaning 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Cleaning on the Mainten
21. Paper thinner than a postcard including plain paper or notepad paper cut to a small size when printing on paper smaller than A5 Picture postcards Postcards affixed with photos or stickers Envelopes with a double flap or sticker flaps Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive Any type of paper with holes Paper that is not rectangular Paper bound with staples or glue Paper with adhesives Paper decorated with glitter etc A Page top Routine Maintenance Page 42 of 437 pages Basic Guide P E Contents gt Routine Maintenance Routine Maintenance This section describes the procedure to replace ink tanks when they run out of ink to clean the printer when the print result is faint or to take an action when paper does not feed properly Replacing an Ink Tank Replacing Procedure Checking the Ink Status When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Cleaning the Print Head Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Aligning the Print Head Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette Opening the Maintenance Screens Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows Opening the Canon lIJ Printer Utility Macintosh A Page top Replacing an Ink Tank Page 43 of 437 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Replacing an
22. The survey program is turned on Turn off if you wish to turn off this program click Turn off e Do not display the confirmation screen when information is sent If the check box is selected the information will be sent automatically If the check box is not selected the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program icon will appear in the Dock at the time of the next survey Click the icon then follow the on screen instructions e Turn off Turn on button Click the Turn off button to stop the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Click the Turn on button to restart the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Page top Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing Page 402 of 437 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing e Check Is the paper size or media type appropriate e Make sure that the actual size of the paper is suitable for automatic duplex printing The sizes of media suitable for automatic duplex printing are A4 Letter A5 and 5 x 7 Load paper of suitable size then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer e Make sure that the Page Size or Paper Size setting matches the actual size of the paper with a size suitable for automatic duplex printing First check the Page Size setting in the application software you are printing from Then check
23. gt Troubleshooting gt Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange When a printer error occurs the Alarm lamp flashes orange as shown below The number of flashes indicates the type of error that has occurred Count the flashes and take the appropriate action to correct the error eee e B A A Note the number of flashes B Flashes repeatedly Number of flashes Cause Two flashes Printer is out of paper Paper does not feed Three flashes Paper Output Tray is closed Paper jams Four flashes Ink tank is not installed properly Ink may have run out Five flashes Print Head is not installed Print Head is defective Reload paper in the Rear Tray or Cassette and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer If the Paper Output Tray is closed open it The printer resumes printing If opening the Paper Output Tray does not resolve the problem or if the tray was open to begin with the paper may be jammed Remove the jammed paper reload paper properly in the printer then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Paper Jams e Ifthe lamp on the ink tank is not lit the ink tank may not be installed properly Install an appropriate ink tank e Ifthe lamp on the ink tank is flashing ink may have run out Replacing the ink tank is recommended If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing press the printer s RESUME CANCEL button with the ink tank installed
24. s gt Poster Printing s gt Booklet Printing s gt Duplex Printing s gt Stamp Background Printing gt Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background s gt Printing an Envelope s gt Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Displaying the Print Results before Printing gt Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page top Printing with Easy Setup Page 223 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Printing with Easy Setup Printing with Easy Setup The simple setup procedure for carrying out appropriate printing on this printer is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select a frequently used profile In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab select a printing profile suited for the purpose When you select a printing profile the Additional Features Media Type and Printer Paper Size settings are automatically switched to the values that were preset Borderiess Parting Duplex Parting F Grayscale Porting Pert from Last Page Fast Speed Preety Meda Type Porter Paper Size Pian Paper Ieas Onertation O Potrat Landscape Pert Quality Paper Source 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality 4 Select the paper source Select Automatically Select Rear Tray Casset
25. there may be more steps For details refer to the user s manual of your application software Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning or to configure printing profile that are common for all application software 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown below e In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e In Windows XP select the start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers 2 Right click your model name icon and then select Printing Preferences from the displayed menu The printer driver setup window appears P important Opening the printer driver setup window through Properties displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the Ports or Advanced tab Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences or application software For tabs regarding Windows functions refer to the user s manual for the Windows O Page top Maintenance Tab Page 300 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt Maintenance Tab Maintenance Tab The Maintenance tab allows you to
26. 13 69 inches 203 2 x 347 6 mm 4 0 12 in 3 0 mm p 1 60 in 40 7 mm 0 20 in 5 0 mm ya of P pe 0 25 in 6 4 mm 0 25 in 6 3 mm 1 47 in 37 4 mm HEB Recommended printing area E Printable area Page top Envelopes Page 413 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Envelopes Envelopes Size Recommended Printing Area width x height European DL 4 06 x 7 07 inches 103 2 x 179 6 mm US Comm Env 10 3 86 x 7 91 inches 98 0 x 200 9 mm 0 12 in 3 0 mm 1 04 in 26 5 mm 4 0 13 in 3 4mm 0 13 in 3 4mm HEB Recommended printing area Page top Deleting the Undesired Print Job Page 414 of 437 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Deleting the Undesired Print Job Deleting the Undesired Print Job If the printer does not start printing the print job data cancelled or failed may be remaining Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor 1 Display the Canon IJ Status Monitor Click the status monitor button displayed on the task bar The Canon lJ Status Monitor appears 2 Display the print jobs Click Display Print Queue The print queue window opens 3 Delete the print jobs Select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu When the confirmation message appears click Yes The deletion of the print job is complete P important Users who have not been g
27. 8 5 11 215 2279 deem Color rtensty Ago O Grayscale Prrang Preview before parting Automatically Select Plain paper whose Page Size is Letter 8 5 x11 A5 A4 or B5 is fed from the cassette Other sizes of plain paper and paper types other than plain paper are fed from the rear tray Rear Tray Paper is always fed from the rear tray Cassette Paper is always fed from the cassette P important Plain paper that is not Letter 8 5 x11 A5 A4 or B5 and paper types other than plain paper cannot be fed from the cassette Continuous Autofeed When plain paper runs out in the specified paper source the printer automatically switches the paper source When printing a large volume of data load plain paper of the same size in both paper sources You can therefore reduce the trouble of having to load paper because the printer automatically switches Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Page 260 of 437 pages the paper source when paper runs out in one paper source P important Continuous Autofeed is unavailable when paper other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type Since the printer feeds paper from the paper source that was being used the last time Continuous Autofeed was selected and printing ended load the same paper in both the rear tray and the cassette Paper Allocation When the media type for the print data is plain paper and the paper size matches the paper allocation setting the printer au
28. A If the orange tape is left as in B pull the orange tape and remove it Page top Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Page 384 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected e Check 1 Is printing performed in Quiet Mode Print speed is reduced if you specified to print in Quiet Mode in the printer driver For faster printing do not print in Quiet Mode s gt Reducing the Printer Noise e Check 2 Is the print quality set too high Increase the printing speed setting in the printer driver Setting to prioritize speed makes printing faster Windows 1 Open the printer properties dialog box Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Click Here Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the printer properties dialog box quit the running application software 2 On the Main sheet select Fast for the Print Quality setting Depending on the media type the Fast option may not be available Mom 1 Open the Print dialog box Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh 2 Select Quality amp Media in the pop up menu and then select Fast for the Print Quality setting Depending on the media type the Fast option may not be available E8 Note Printing speed may not improve noticeably by following the instructions above depending on your system environ
29. Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Representing Image Data with a Single Color Representing Image Data with a Single Color With the Monochrome Effects function you can benefit from coloring effects such as changing a photograph to a sepia tone image The procedure for performing Monochrome Effects is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Monochrome Effects Check the Monochrome Effects check box on the Effects tab and select your desired color When you use Select Color move the Color slider to specify the color you want The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver T Casck Setup gt Man 3 Page Setup af Efects fj Martenance FI Ywd Photo al Pete Optimizer PRO Photo Noise Reduction Pian Paper Leter 85x11 215 5 273 4mm 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with a single color P important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Monochrome Effects appears Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 288 of 437 pages grayed out and is unavailable Page top Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Page 289 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application So
30. Borderiess Parting FI Duplex Prrtng El Graecae Prrtng Print from Last Page Fast Speed Pricety Meda Tipe Porter Poper Size Plan Pacer l Iess Onertation D Porras Pere Quality Pager Source Sanders Atomaca Select Copies 1 Cok Ca The Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box opens Nave Qora Cance o 4 Save the settings Set Name then click OK If necessary set the items in Options The printing profile is saved and the Quick Setup tab is displayed again The name and icon are added to the Commonly Used Settings list Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 348 of 437 pages P important To save the page size orientation and number of copies that was set in each sheet click Options and check each item Note When you install the printer driver again or upgrade the version of the printer driver the print settings you registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved If a profile is deleted register the print settings again Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile 1 Select the printing profile to be deleted Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick Setup tab 2 Delete the printing profile Click Delete When the confirmation message appears click OK The selected printing profile is deleted from the Commonly Used Seitings list Note Printing profiles that are
31. Fart or Colors Are _ Examining the Norde Check Patten __ Gesning the Pret Head _ Geaning the Pad inthe Cassetic D Tips on How to Use Your Printer L Parting This Manual Basic Guide Advanced Guide _ Using Keywords to Find a Documert Desc _ Symbols Used in This Document _ Tredemates M anna ia Fama i ntn fiina M m EDN EA Oii Troubleshooting 1 Click Aseh The search pane is displayed to the left of the on screen manual E Note Click 45h to close or display the search pane 2 Enter a keyword In Keyword enter a keyword for the item to be checked When you want to enter multiple keywords insert a space between the keywords ES Note You can enter up to 10 search keywords or up to 255 characters Uppercase and lowercase are not discriminated The program can also search for keywords that contain spaces A convenient way of quickly finding a document to be read is to enter keywords as described below To learn how to operate a function you are using Enter the menu name displayed on the operation panel of this machine or on the computer for example frame erase copy To find an explanation of the operation for a specific purpose Enter function item to be printed for example print calendar 3 Click Start Searching Using Keywords to Find a Document Page 96 of 437 pages The search is started and the titles of documents containing the keyword are displayed in the sea
32. Function You can sharpen out of focus faces in a photo s gt Using the Face Sharpener Function Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles s gt Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles Using the Blemish Remover Function Image Adjustment You can adjust brightness and contrast or sharpen the entire image You can also blur the outline of the subjects or remove the base color Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 151 of 437 pages Adjusting Images Page top Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 152 of 437 pages NelFilesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Apply optimum corrections automatically to the photos used for an album calendar etc P important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing by selecting Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ott Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved it cannot be corrected again with A
33. Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Basic Guide E E Contents gt Printing gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX m Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX This section introduces a few of the useful functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Creating Your Own Prints You can create an album or calendar using your photos Album Calendar Stickers Layout Print Correcting Images You can use Red Eye Correction Face Sharpener Digital Face Smoothing Brightness Contrast etc to adjust correct or enhance images automatically or manually Ss Brightness O A Page top Page 13 of 437 pages Printing Documents Windows Page 14 of 437 pages isle Gres Contents gt Printing gt Printing Documents Windows Printing Documents Windows This section describes the procedure to print a document of A4 size on plain paper For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide E8 Note Operations may vary depending on your software application For details on the operation refer to the instruction manual of your application The screens used in this section are for printing with Windows Vista operating system Ultimate Edition hereafter referred to as Windows Vista 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on See Front View 2 Load paper See Loading Paper Here we
34. If you select No the information will be sent automatically ES Note If you select Uninstall or Remove the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is uninstalled Follow the on screen instructions MEE ne Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears If the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is installed the printer usage information is scheduled to be sent three months and then six months after the installation After that it is scheduled to be sent every six months for about four years The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program icon appears in the Dock when it is time to send the printer usage information In Mac OS X v 10 3 9 the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is not installed Read the instructions on the screen after clicking the icon then follow the procedure below AO Canon inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program gt Thank you for your cooperation in Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey d Program For development and marketing of products that better meet customer needs Canon requests that the information below recorded in your Canon product be collected on your computer and sent to Canon through the Internet Informaton related to Canon inkjet printer OS version and language informaiton Printer s 1D number installation date and time ink use informaton number of sheets printed and maintenance info
35. Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click a Delete All Imported Images Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Editing Page 140 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Editing Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ede suckers as needed Create Stickers Insert text add imagas or change layout a 2 Edit the stickers if necessary gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited stickers It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again gt Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Printing Page 141 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Printing SN Easy PhotoPrint EX S2 Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears Check sticker print settings Cick the Pring button to pring with the current settings Printing starts Pr
36. Li Paper Source Actomatically Select 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select Driver Matching for Color Correction Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 273 of 437 pages T Manual Coler Adjustment lee Calor Correction KM None 6 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance of Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 7 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity m Adjusting Contrast O Page top Printing with ICC Profiles Page 274 of 437 pages Advanced Giitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Printing with ICC Profiles Printing with ICC Profiles When the image data has
37. Page 383 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected e Check 1 Are the Print Head nozzles clogged Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e f the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly Check to see if a particular color s ink tank is not empty If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient perform the Print Head Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the printer and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center e Check 2 Has the ink run out Open the Top Cover then check the status of ink lamp Routine Maintenance e Check 3 Is the orange tape or protective film remaining Make sure that all of the protective film is peeled off and the air hole is exposed as illustrated in
38. Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Borderless Printing Fit to Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing Printing an Envelope Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper Managing the Printer Power Reducing the Printer Noise Changing the Printer Operation Mode Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position Checking the Print Head Nozzles Cleaning Inside the Printer Overview of the Printer Driver Canon lJ Printer Driver How to Open th
39. Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots gt Printed Paper Curls 000000000000 0000 0K Printed Paper Has Ink Blots e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2 If the intensity is set high reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy causing paper abrasion Confirm the intensity using the printer driver s gt Adjusting Intensity e Check 3 Is Photo Paper used for printing photographs When printing data with high color saturation such as photographs or images in deep color we recommend using Photo Paper Plus Glossy II or other Canon speciality paper Loading Paper Page top Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 372 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged The Edges of Paper Printed Surface Are Smudged Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Is the appropriate type of paper used Check the followings e Check to see if the paper you are printing on is suitable fo
40. PictBridge compliant device selecting items with i mark allows you to print shooting info Exif Data in list format 20 up or on the margins of the specified data 1 up May not be available with some Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices 3 Printed in 35 mm Film Style Layout Contact Printing Layout Available only with a Canon brand PictBridge compliant device May not be available with some Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices Print date amp file no Default Off No printing Date File No Both Off Image optimize Default 1 On Exif Print Off NR Noise Reduction 2 VIVID 2 Face 2 Red Eye 2 1 Photos are optimized for printing using the Photo optimizer pro function 2 Can be selected only on certain Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices May not be selected depending on the device Trimming Default Off No trimming On follow the camera s setting Off Page 323 of 437 pages ndvanced Guide About PictBridge Print Settings Page 324 of 437 pages Page top Maintenance Page 325 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance Maintenance s gt Cleaning Your Printer Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page top Cleaning Your Printer Page 326 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer Cleaning Your Printer gt Cleaning s Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer Cleaning t
41. Q akty Pa Some aed Nene te a mmm naun a Moan Pet oth Ort Sea vexame omaa Coos toes ee m Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Open System Preferences and click Print amp Fax Opening the Maintenance Screens 3 Select your printer s name in Printers and click Open Print Queue The list of printer jobs appears 4 Click Utility The Printer List dialog box appears 5 Select your printer s name in the Product list and click Maintenance The Canon lJ Printer Utility starts up PO _____ Ganon B Prnnes Upbty 04700 series oo Ocarery K Oum lt Dinnatas utwarted wrudges and lings in the priet sonst Deep Clearing a Urcieg sessie that cannot be cleared by regular Gearing aman Plane Clearing Presem paper smacoes during pritting Acher Oearng FF bosia print sober ceasing for smoothe paser feeding ES Note When you are using Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 Follow the procedure below to open the Canon lJ Printer Utility 1 Select Applications from the Go menu 2 Double click the Utilities folder and double click Printer Setup Utility to open the Printer List dialog box 3 Select your printer s name in the Name list and click Utility 4 Select your printer s name in the Product list and click Maintenance The Canon lJ Printer Utility will start up For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide
42. Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper gt Managing the Printer Power Reducing the Printer Noise gt Changing the Printer Operation Mode Page top Changing the Print Options Page 346 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Print Options Changing the Print Options You change the detailed print driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software Check this check box if part of the image data is cut off the paper source during printing differs from the driver settings or printing fails The procedure for changing the print options is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Print Options on the Page Setup tab m Canon iP4700 series Printing Preferences i bis Man D Page Sete gf Stace Al Mortens El Page Sze ketier 8 57x117 gt Orientation Al Pora A ungego F Astate 180 degrees a Portes F Same as Page Size Page Lagat Noenalsine 2 8 FetoPage Pign Paper Lener 8 5 11 215 279 deem Nomalsize Borieless us J Prirt Area Setup Lengad taping det Specty Magn Ei Frevert loss of pert dstal F Disable ICM requeed trom the appicaton software D Disable the
43. Support If USB Printing Support is not displayed make sure that the printer is correctly connected to the computer Check 3 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the printer and the computer 3 Click the General tab and make sure that there is no indication of a problem with the device If a device error is displayed refer to Windows help to resolve the error _acintosh Error Number 300 Is Displayed e Check 1 If the Power lamp is off make sure that the power plug is plugged in then turn the printer on While the Power lamp is flashing green the printer is initializing Wait until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green e Check 2 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the printer and the computer e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the printer directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again e Check 3 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in the Print dialog box Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh ME Error Number 1700 Is Displayed e See Eight flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action BETTIE ink Info Number 1600 Is Displayed e See Four flash
44. Then printing can continue Replacing the ink tank is recommended after the printing The printer may be damaged if printing is continued under the ink out condition Routine Maintenance ES Note If multiple ink lamps are flashing refer to Routine Maintenance and confirm the status of each ink tank Follow the directions given in your setup manual to install the Print Head If the Print Head is already installed remove the Print Head once and then reinstall it If the error is still not resolved the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Six flashes The Inner Cover is opened Seven flashes Ink tank is not installed in the correct position Eight flashes Ink absorber is almost full Nine flashes The printer has not received a response from the digital camera The digital camera or digital video camcorder connected is not compatible with this printer Ten flashes Cannot perform duplex printing Eleven flashes Automatic Print Head Alignment failed Page 359 of 437 pages If the Inner Cover is open when starting printing on paper close the Inner Cover then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer e Some ink tanks are not installed in the correct position The lamps on the ink tanks flash e More than one ink tanks of the same color are installed The lamps on the ink tanks flash Confirm that the ink tanks are installed in the appropriate posi
45. WebPrint EX If Easy WebPrint EX is not installed the guidance for installation of Easy WebPrint EX may appear from the taskbar on the desktop To install Easy WebPrint EX click the displayed guidance and follow the instructions on the screen You can also install Easy WebPrint EX from the Setup CD ROM To install Easy WebPrint EX select Easy WebPrint EX in Custom Install To install Easy WebPrint EX on your computer Internet Explorer 7 or later is required and the computer must be connected to the Internet Page top Loading Paper Page 27 of 437 pages Basic Guide Py Contents gt Loading Paper Loading Paper This section describes types of paper you can load and how to load printing paper in the Cassette or Rear Tray Loading Paper Paper Source to Load Paper Loading Paper in the Cassette Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use Page top Loading Paper Page 28 of 437 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper Loading Paper Paper Source to Load Paper gt Loading Paper in the Cassette Loading Paper in the Rear Tray s Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use m Paper Source to Load Paper The printer has two paper sources to feed paper Cassette and Rear Tray You can load paper in either one of the paper sources depending on the page size and media type of paper Paper is fed from the Cassette or Rear Tray depe
46. a moistened cotton swab gt Important After cleaning the smeared Pad dry it completely If the problem is not resolved contact the service center O A Page top Opening the Maintenance Screens Page 75 of 437 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Opening the Maintenance Screens Opening the Maintenance Screens You can perform maintenance operations from the printer driver setup window Windows or the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh m Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Click Control Panel and Printer under Hardware and Sound When you are using Windows XP Click Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware then Printers and Faxes When you are using Windows 2000 Click Control Panel and Printers 3 Right click the Canon XXX icon where XXX is your printer s name and select Printing Preferences The printer driver setup window will appear E9 Note You can also open the printer driver setup window from your software application or My Printer on the desktop For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide fs oe a om Curae FOO saves Pring Deiari N o ee Due fo aes ae fed en Bh ere Dren aren P Pew Saw iae Paveg toto orerg sitra frion oi Pewre on Patr Borsevess wt ses Pre syni Foe Petter Lee Pope ut Coet Moty tinis Tone wiy Pose bier Pan how ia eee D Peet Emam an
47. a specified input ICC profile you can print by using the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the data effectively The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print Specify an ICC Profile from the Application Software and Print the Data When you print the editing and touch up results of Adobe Photoshop Canon Digital Photo Professional or any application software that allows you to specify input and printing ICC profiles you print by effectively using the color space of the input ICC profile specified in the image data To use this printing method use your application software to select color management items and specify an input ICC profile and a printing ICC profile in the image data Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself or one for special Canon paper from your application software be sure to select color management items from your application software For instructions refer to the manual of the application software you are using 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the printer from the Media Type list on the Main tab Canon iP4700 series Printing Preferences TR aksep Man 13 Page Setup of tects Aj Martenance Meds Type Pan Pape Paper Source Atcratcaly Seet Pret Qualty HA Pian Paper Gatton Leter 8 S11 215 2279 4am Color intensty S Ago a Ge
48. account and restart the operation from the beginning 2 Execute the uninstaller Click Execute When the confirmation message appears click Yes When all the files have been deleted click Complete The deletion of the printer driver is complete When There is No Uninstaller When there is no uninstaller in the Start menu of Windows Vista follow these steps 1 Select the printer to be deleted Select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers Click the model to delete then press the Alt key on your keyboard On the File menu click Delete 2 Delete the printer When the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue Then when the confirmation message appears click Yes The icon is deleted 3 Select the printer driver to be deleted Press the Alt key On the File menu select Run as administrator and then click Server Properties When the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue Click the Drivers tab In the Installed printer drivers list click the printer to delete Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Page 418 of 437 pages 4 Delete the printer driver When you click Remove Remove Driver And Package dialog box is displayed Select Remove driver and driver package and then click OK In the confirmation dialog box click Yes When data collection is completed in the Remove Driver Package dialog box click Delete 5 Click OK The deletion of t
49. be added until all the images on the frames is decreased pages with the current layout can be fitted ES Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected Page top Changing Background Page 200 of 437 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Background Easy PhotoPrint EX amp Changing Background You can change the background of each page P important a You cannot change the background of the Photo Print Stickers and Layout Print Click Background in the Page Setup screen or select the page you want to change the background of in the Edit screen then click al Change Background E9 Note a The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create 3 5 Single calor Image file No background A aoa Jaaa aae J Select the type of background you want to use in the Change Background dialog box When Select from samples is Selected Select the image you want to use from Samples and click OK ES Note Select from samples will be displayed only if Aloum has been selected Various backgrounds are available on our website besides those saved
50. before printing Install it on your computer to use it Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer E Note We recommend that you test print on an unneeded printable DVD CD first Page top Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer Page 312 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer e CD LabelPrint is bundled application software that allows you to edit and modify data before printing Install it on your computer to use it To install this software insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive then perform Custom Install and select CD LabelPrint e For details on how to print with CD LabelPrint refer to its manual If you are using a Windows computer click Start gt All Programs or Programs in Windows 2000 gt CD LabelPrint gt Manual If you are using a Macintosh open the Applications folder in the location where the MP Drivers have been installed gt CD LabelPrint folder gt Manual folder gt double click Manual htm Prt ee tele oo Gm Ge ju op mp Man jme yw je w wy r ADS BDBOIKRA Fe JP Js szurjieramn Llao l mi eo Ea fm on i aH 5 gi E 5 sabai Page top Printing Area Page 313 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side
51. click OK P important You cannot print dates on framed images Note The date is displayed in the short date format mm dd yyyy etc specified in your operating system See Help for details on setting dates Printing Dates on Photos Page 211 of 437 pages Page top Attaching Comments to Photos Page 212 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Attaching Comments to Photos gil Easy PhotoPrint EX ES Attaching Comments to Photos You can attach comments to images and display them in your album The photo name shooting date and comments are displayed from top to bottom in a comment box A memory of summer 09 20 08 Family playing with sa nd P important You cannot attach comments to Photo Print Calendar Stickers and Layout Print i Select the image you want to attach comments to in the Edit screen and click a Edit Image or double click the image Click the Comments tab in the Edit Image dialog box Attaching Comments to Photos V Show image name Image Name IMG0032_s jpg V Show line Comments 7 Show comments Comments 7 Show line V Show capture date Fase E 100 c E Fon 5 Bod Etat Center Postion From Left of Page Size 159 5 mm Width 42 0 mm From Top of Page 632 mm Height 42 0 mm Select the Show comment box check
52. click Start then My Computer In Windows 2000 double click the Sw Computer icon on the desktop 2 Double click the CD ROM icon on the displayed window If the contents of the CD ROM are displayed double click MSETUP4 EXE Double click the CD ROM icon on your desktop to start installation E8 Note Ifthe CD ROM icon is not displayed try the following e Remove the CD ROM from your computer then insert it again e Restart your computer Ifthe icon is still not displayed try different discs and see if they are displayed If other discs are displayed there is a problem with the Setup CD ROM In this case contact the service center e If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen Printer Connection Make sure that the pnnter is connected to the computer and turn on the printer STEP 3 Setup Printer Connection Print Head Alignment Load plain paper into the cassette Completion STEP 4 Information The printer is not detected Check the connection 3 cancel l Cannot Install the Printer Driver Page 363 of 437 pages If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged into the USB port of the printer and is connected to the computer and then follow the procedure below to reinstall the printer driver ES Note In Windows Vista The printer is not detected Check the connection may be displ
53. dialog box opens Load paper in the printer Load a sheet of A4 size or Letter size Matte Photo Paper MP 101 into the rear tray ES Note The type of media and number of sheets to be used differ when you select the manual head alignment Execute head alignment Make sure that the printer is on and click Align Print Head Follow the instruction in the message E8 Note To print and check the current setting open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box and click Print Alignment Value Page top Manual Print Head Alignment Page 335 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Manual Print Head Alignment Manual Print Head Alignment This section describes how to align the Print Head manually If the results of Automatic Print Head Alignment are not satisfactory follow the procedure below to perform Manual Print Head Alignment to precisely align the Print Head For details on performing Automatic Print Head Alignment see Routine Maintenance ES Note Close the Inner Cover if it is open The print head alignment pattern is printed in black and blue only Windows 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 Load three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray and extend the Output Tray Extension 4 Print the pattern 1 Open the printer properties dialog box Open the Printer Propert
54. flaps Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive 1 Prepare envelopes Page 35 of 437 pages Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page 36 of 437 pages e Press down on all four corners and edges of the envelopes to flatten them e If the envelopes are curled hold the opposite corners and gently twist them in the opposite direction j i d If the corner of the envelope flap is folded flatten it e Use a pen to press the leading edge in the inserting direction flat and sharpen the crease E e The figures above show a side view of the leading edge of the envelope gt Important The envelopes may jam in the printer if they are not flat or the edges are not aligned Make sure that no curl or puff exceeds 0 1 inches 3 mm 2 Load envelopes 1 Open the Paper Support and pull it out See Load paper in Loading Photo Paper of Loading Paper in the Rear Tray 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open See Load paper in Loading Photo Paper of Loading Paper in the Rear Tray 3 Slide the Paper Guides A to open them and load the envelopes in the center of the Rear Tray WITH THE ADDRESS SIDE FACING YOU The folded flap of the envelope will be faced down on the left side Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once 4 Slide the Paper Guides A to align them with both sides of the envelopes Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard The
55. following items are needed to print on DVD CDs e CD R Tray G is on the upper side e 8 cm CD R Adapter Needed only when printing on 8 cm DVD CDs Attached to the CD R Tray when shipped Printable DVD CDs Obtain a 12 cm or 8 cm DVD CD with a label surface compatible with inkjet printing A printable disc differs from regular DVD CDs in that its label surface has been specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer Page top Cautions When Printing on DVD CDs Page 306 of 437 pages Nelifirlecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Cautions When Printing on DVD CDs Cautions When Printing on DVD CDs Be sure to use the CD R Tray supplied with this printer It has an G on the upper side e Do not print on DVD CDs that are not compatible with ink jet printing The ink will not dry and may cause problems with the disc itself or devices which the disc is loaded onto Do not print on the DVD CDs recording surface Doing so will make data recorded on DVD CDs unreadable Hold DVD CDs by their edges Do not touch either the label surface printing surface or recording surface Remove any dirt from the CD R Tray before placing DVD CDs on the CD R Tray Loading discs ina dirty CD R Tray may scratch the recording surface of the discs After printing allow the printing surface of the disc to dry naturally Do not use hairdryers or expose the disc to di
56. follows In Windows Vista 1 Install the printer driver on the client systems To install the driver load the Setup CD ROM that comes with the printer and select Custom Install For details on connection instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started E8 Note During the installation a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation 2 Start the wizard Select the Start menu gt Network gt Add Printer The Add Printer window appears 3 Add a printer Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer and click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared and then click Next EA Note If the icon for the printer is not displayed check that the printer is actually connected to the print server It may take some time for the icon for the printer to appear 4 Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers window The setup on the client systems is complete You can now share the printer in the network In Windows XP Windows 2000 1 Install the printer driver on the client systems To install the driver load the Setup CD ROM that comes with the printer and select Custom Install For details on connection instructions refe
57. for dearing ewecate Nozzle Oreck MAN Colors 3 Clearing corsarees in Wrist heck revs Cancel 4 5 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern 6 Examine the nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern E8 Note f the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice clean the Print Head deeply See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply O A Page top Page 61 of 437 pages Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 62 of 437 pages Basic Guide E a Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Cleaning the Print Head Deeply m Cleaning the Print Head Deeply If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the Print Head clean the Print Head deeply Cleaning the Print Head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the Print Head so clean the Print Head deeply only when necessary You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper Windows 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important If the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open t
58. from the wall outlet or turn off the extender cable connector before the Power lamp is turned off the Print Head will not be capped properly and this will cause drying or clogging To unplug the power cord be sure to follow this procedure e Print periodically Just as the tip of a felt pen becomes dry and unusable if it has not been used for a long time even if it is capped the Print Head too may become dried or clogged if the printer has not been used for a long time We recommend the printer to be used at least once a month E8 Note Tips on How to Use Your Printer Depending on the type of paper ink may blur if you trace the printed area with a highlight pen or paint stick or bleed if water or sweat comes in contact with the printed area m Lamp on the printer is flashing What can do e Alarm lamp is flashing orange A B A C A Alarm lamp flashes B Alarm lamp is off C Alarm lamp flashes repeatedly Your printer has an error Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide then resolve the error e Power lamp flashes green and Alarm lamp flashes orange alternately An error that requires repair has occurred Contact the service center m Colors are uneven and print results are blurred Tip Print the nozzle check pattern to check if the nozzles are clogged If the print head nozzles are clogged colors may become uneven or the print results may be blurred In
59. in step 1 all print jobs in the queue are canceled Reprint if necessary E9 Note When reloading the paper confirm that you are using the correct paper and are loading it correctly Loading Paper A5 sized paper is suited to printing documents consisting mainly of text We do not recommend using such paper to print documents with photos or graphics since the printout may curl and cause paper exit jams If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the printer or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper contact the service center Page 390 of 437 pages Page top Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit Page 391 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams gt Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit Remove the paper following the procedure below gt 1 Detach the Rear Cover 2 Pull the paper out slowly E8 Note Be careful not to touch the components inside the printer a If you cannot pull the paper out turn the printer off and turn it back on The paper may be ejected automatically 3 Attach the Rear Cover Push the left side of the Rear Cover until it is closed completely zy By If you were not able to remove the paper out in step 2 4 Remove the Cassette 5 Pull the paper out slowly Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at
60. in the application Changing Background Click Search backgrounds to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free Internet connection is required to access the website Internet connection fees apply This function may not be available in some regions Exit Easy PhotoPrint EX before installing backgrounds When Single color is Selected Select the color you want to use from Standard color or Custom color and click OK Change Background Background Type D Select from samples gt Image file No background Background Color Standard color LJ D Custom color Customize Apply to all pages Cancel When Image file is Selected Set Image File Path and Image Layout then click OK Page 201 of 437 pages Changing Background Page 202 of 437 pages Background Type O Select from samples Single color Image file No background Image File Path gt C Users User Name IMGO032_s ipg E Semitransparent Transparency 10 v Image Layout Crop to fit page O Auto scale to fit page Tile Original size Apply to all pages Note See Help for details on how to set the background in the Change Background dialog box Page top Adding Photos Page 203 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Se
61. increase the contrast On the other hand to make the differences between the light and dark portions of images smaller and less distinct reduce the contrast No adjustment Adjust the contrast The procedure for adjusting contrast is as follows You can also set contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set DR ak Sem Man 13 Page Setup of Btects Af Martenance Meds Type Plan Paper Paper Source Atomatcally Select xj Pian Paper Leter 8 5 11 215 2279 dem The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens o Adjust the contrast Moving the Contrast slider to the right increases the contrast and moving it to the left decreases the contrast You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 After adjusting each color click OK Adjusting Contrast Page 285 of 437 pages 0 B amp low High 0 E i Low High 0 a Q Low High ABCDEF aP 1234567 owes Nomai z Sample Type Standard a View Color Patterns 0K cancel Heo P important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you exec
62. layout or select whether to print the date on which the picture was taken on the photo ES Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size Orientation Double page album or the type of page selected front cover inside pages or back cover You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox in the Change Layout dialog box and click Date Settings 5 If you want to change the background click Background The Change Background dialog box appears In the Change Background dialog box you can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Selecting a Photo Page 119 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Selecting a Photo Easy PhotoPrint EX S6 Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears otoPrint EX E Seket roges for abam You can aso add repace mages ode n _ edting process To correct or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance butt Apply Corrections and enhancements in the resulting screen a 7 x a A E sory date E Orio a r cee E Computer E P Network INGOODO_stog IMGO001_sJo9 MG0109_sio9 a by g Fron
63. loaded in the Cassette E9 Note Load A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper in the Cassette and other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open 4 Create or open a document to print using an appropriate software application 5 Open the Print dialog box Select Print on the File menu in your software application The Print dialog box will appear EA Note If the dialog box below appears click Down arrow Primer Canon 174700 series Poun sandid tl D C e Preview Cacr Ge 6 Specify the required print settings 1 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in Printer Printing Documents Macintosh 2 Select the page size of the loaded paper in Paper Size Here we select A4 3 Select Quality amp Media in the pop up menu c DOQ XX Peats Standard Copes F Colured Pages OM From 1 to Ovveetation ya Te O Print header ard footer Cure toe GD 4 Select the media type of the loaded paper in Media Type Here we select Plain Paper ES Note If you select A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper when Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source the printer feeds the paper from the Cassette If you select other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper the printer feeds the paper from the Rear Tray If you select the wrong page size or media ty
64. make sure that A4 plain paper is loaded in the Cassette E8 Note Load A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper in the Cassette and other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open 4 Create or open a document to print using an appropriate software application 5 Open the printer driver setup window 1 Select Print on the File menu or the command bar in your software application The Print dialog box will appear 2 Make sure that your printer s name is selected E8 Note If another printer s name is selected click and select your printer s name 3 Click Preferences or Properties Printing Documents Windows 6 Specify the required print settings 1 Select Business Document in Commonly Used Settings ES Note When the print object such as Business Document or Photo Printing is selected in Commonly Used Settings the items in Additional Features will be selected automatically The settings suitable for the print object such as media type or print quality will also appear When you specify two or more copies in Copies the Collate check box will be selected 2 Make sure of the displayed settings Here we make sure that Plain Paper in Media Type Standard in Print Quality A4 in Printer Paper Size and Automatically Select in Paper Source are selected E8 Note The settings can be changed
65. not be displayed correctly or Easy PhotoPrint EX may shut down depending on the TIFF format In such cases move the TIFF file to another folder or recreate the file in a different file format and then select the folder again Note The thumbnails of files in unsupported formats are displayed as Question Mark When Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from Digital Photo Professional all image files supported by Digital Photo Professional will be displayed File Formats Extensions Supported by Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file el6 Easy PhotoPrint EX Album file el1 Easy PhotoPrint EX Stickers file el2 Easy PhotoPrint EX Calendar file el4 Easy PhotoPrint EX Layout file el5 CD LabelPrint data cld What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 105 of 437 pages Page top Printing Photos AdvancediGuide Page 106 of 437 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to print your favorite photos in a variety of layouts You can also create borderless photos easily Corrections suitable for photos will be applied automatically when printing Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting a Photo 3 Selecting the Paper 4 Printing Try This s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Printing on a DVD CD s gt Printing V
66. operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save enhanced images as new files E8 Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for enhanced images 7 Click Exit P important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images Page top Page 166 of 437 pages Adjusting Images Page 167 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Adjusting Images Easy PhotoPrint EX Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness contrast etc of images 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears Te AR RedEye Conection DBP _Faxeshapenes QO vicratFace Smoathing EEA Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to adjust from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images wind
67. os Diza Face Smocthing CAVE User Namegisljpg 1 Toolbar Toolbar Q g Zoom In Zoom Out Displays the enlarged or reduced preview of the page E Full Screen Displays the entire image in Preview Compare Displays the Compare Images window You can compare the images before and after the correction enhancement side by side The image before the correction enhancement is displayed on the left and the image after the correction enhancement is displayed on the right Correct Enhance Images Window 2 Task Area Available tasks and settings may vary between the Auto and Manual tabs Click Auto or Manual to display the corresponding tab Auto Tab Select to correct automatically Manual Auto Photo Fix Te fa RedEye Conection QQ Feesn Ls Ge Week ext Storg 9S Digtal Face Smcething O pey io st images CAUsers User Namelgitljpg Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos P important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing Select this option in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ct Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Prioritize Exif Info Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily b
68. printing order is as follows You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Specify the number of copies to be printed For Copies on the Page Setup tab specify the number of copies to be printed T ask Senp E Man B Page Setup gf tects AJ Martenance El Page Sze Letter 85x117 z amp Orientation a 5 Pora A Langecape Rotate 180 degrees a P P Sone s Page Sre Page Lyt Nomnalsize _ a 08 a 3 cm EEE J 0 Pret Aves Setup Stacie Sede Longa taping Leh Specty Mang 3 Specify the print order Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order When you do this you do not need to sort pages into their correct order after printing 4 Set up collated printing when you specify multiple copies in the Copies box Check the Collate check box when you are specifying multiple copy together Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Page 227 of 437 pages Uncheck this check box to print all pages with the same page number together 5 Complete the setup Click OK The specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order P important When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function give priority to the printer driver settings However if the print results are not acceptable
69. s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos s gt Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos Setting Calendar Display Setting Holidays s gt Saving s gt Opening Saved Files Printing Calendars Page 127 of 437 pages Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 128 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selact the Kem you want to create from the meny Selact LOrecy to access saved tems Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 129 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Calendar from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Soecty paper sze etc n General Settings then select a desga Cick the button at tha bottom to customize calendar eiemants After spectying paper sae atc proceed to the Select Images screen General S
70. shall not be liable for any malfunction or trouble which may be caused by continuation of printing under the ink out condition Note If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled the ink tank is displayed in gray on the printer status monitor Windows and Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Routine Maintenance If a PictBridge compliant device is connected via a USB hub remove the hub and connect it directly to the printer Page top Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately Page 361 of 437 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately Power Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately A printer problem has occurred Disconnect the printer cable from the printer turn the printer off and then unplug the printer from the power supply Plug the printer back in and turn the printer back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Page top Cannot Install the Printer Driver Page 362 of 437 pages Adad Gutels Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Install the Printer Driver Cannot Install the Printer Driver e If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD ROM is inserted into your computer s disc drive Windows Start the installation following the procedure below 1 Click Start then Computer In Windows XP
71. the Installation Complete window is displayed check that the printer and the computer are connected through a cable To select the connection port for your printer manually check the Select printer port check box and click Manual Selection At the Select Port window select the connection destination and then click OK Complete the installation Click Complete Turn on the printer and wait awhile until the connection is recognized This procedure installs the printer driver is complete Depending on the environment you are using a message prompting you to restart the computer may be displayed To complete the installation properly restart the computer P important a You can download the printer driver for free but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility Related Topics Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Before Installing the Printer Driver Installing the Printer Driver Page 421 of 437 pages Page top Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Page 422 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Follow the procedure below to uninstall all of the installed on screen manuals from your computer Windows All of the installed on screen manuals will be deleted at the same time 1 Click Start gt All Programs Programs in Windows 2000 gt Canon XXX Manual where XXX is your printer s name gt
72. the Page Size setting on the Page Setup sheet in the printer properties dialog box Windows or the Paper Size on the Page Setup dialog box Macintosh ES Note Duplex printing may not be available depending on the version of the application software e Make sure that the type of loaded paper is suitable for automatic duplex printing on the Main sheet Windows or the Quality amp Media sheet on the Print dialog box Macintosh To switch to manual duplex printing follow the procedure below Windows Open the printer properties dialog box clear the Automatic check box on the Page Setup sheet and reprint When performing manual duplex printing note the following e f you are printing three or more pages of a document with manual duplex printing one side of all sheets of paper will be printed first Turn over the paper and reload the paper in the printer and then the reverse side of all sheets of paper will be printed Be careful not to change the order of paper in the stack e The procedure for reversing the paper varies depending on the staple side and printing orientation Follow the on screen instructions _acintosh Manual duplex printing is not available Page top For Windows Users Page 403 of 437 pages Advancedemde Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt For Windows Users For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed e Check Is the printer status monitor enabled Make sure that En
73. the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears JD Auto Photo Fix oS RedEye Conection 92 Face Shapenet os Diza Face Smocthing En CA Users User Name gitljpg EA Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview ES Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Blemish Remover Using the Blemish Remover Function Adjust pe oS RedEye Comection 22 Face Baghtens 92 Face Shapenct oS Digtal Face Stoctheg 99 Blemish Remover Soncdly the xey you wort to corect EA Note Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to enhance then click OK that appears over the image Moles in and around the selected area are removed andthe amp Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image E8 Note Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement
74. the application software setting takes precedence Page top Paper Jams Page 389 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams Paper Jams Note f you need to turn off the printer to remove jammed paper during printing press the RESUME CANCEL button to cancel print jobs before turning off the printer Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray s gt Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing In Other Cases Page top Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams gt Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Remove the paper following the procedure below 1 Slowly pull the paper out either from the Rear Tray or from the Paper Output Slot whichever is easier E8 Note Ifthe paper tears and a piece remains inside the printer open the Top Cover and remove it Be careful not to touch the components inside the printer After removing all paper close the Top Cover turn the printer off and turn it back on f you cannot pull the paper out turn the printer off and turn it back on The paper may be ejected automatically 2 Reload the paper and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer If you turned off the printer
75. the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 161 of 437 pages The facial area in and around the selected area is sharpened and the g Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image E9 Note a You can also drag to rotate the selected area Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for corrected images 7 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 162 of 437 pages Nelifiplesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can perform the Digital Face Smoothing function either automatically or manually 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images T
76. the ink tank the printer starts cleaning the Print Head automatically Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the Print Head The Power lamp flashes green while cleaning If printed ruled lines are misaligned or the print head position is misaligned adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head The printer may make noise during operation O Page 46 of 437 pages Replacing an Ink Tank Page 47 of 437 pages A Page top Checking the Ink Status Page 48 of 437 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Replacing an Ink Tank gt Checking the Ink Status m Checking the Ink Status You can check the ink status on the ink lamps or your computer screen With the Ink Lamps 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and open the Paper Output Tray gently 2 Open the Top Cover E Note The printer may make operating noise when the Print Head moves to the replacement position 3 Check the ink lamps Close the Top Cover after checking the ink lamp status Ink lamp is on The ink tank is correctly installed and there is sufficient ink left for printing Ink lamp is flashing Flashing slowly at around 3 second intervals Ss ate Repeats Ink is low You can continue printing for a while but we recommend you to have a new ink tank available Flashing fast at around 1 second intervals 8 e 8 dies Repeats The ink tank is in
77. the printer from the power supply 2 Remove the Cassette If the paper is loaded on the Rear Tray remove the paper from the Rear Tray and retract the Paper Support 3 Set the printer upright with the left side down 4 Slowly pull the jammed paper out so that the paper does not tear s A E8 Note Set the printer back to its original position immediately after removing the jammed paper 5 Align the paper then reload it in the Cassette Reload paper in the Rear Tray if necessary E8 Note When reloading the paper into the printer confirm that you are using the correct paper and are loading it into the printer correctly Loading Paper 6 Insert the Cassette into the printer again 7 Plug the printer back in and turn the printer back on All print jobs in queue are canceled Reprint if necessary If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the printer or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper contact the service center Page top In Other Cases Page 394 of 437 pages Aa Gutels Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams gt In Other Cases In Other Cases Make sure of the following e Check 1 Are there any foreign objects around the Paper Output Slot e Check 2 Are there any foreign objects in the Rear Tray If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray be sure to turn off the printer unplug it from the power supply then remove the f
78. the roller If the problem is still not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Roller as described above contact the service center 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important if the Inner Cover is open close it Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller 3 Open the Canon lJ Printer Utility See Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh 4 Select Roller Cleaning 1 Make sure that Cleaning is selected in the pop up menu 2 Click Roller Cleaning anc Canan Parnes Lukt i242 G Owning lt Eimnatas utwartad wrudpes and lines in the print sonst Deep Clearing V Unciogt scaxzies that cannot be cleared by regular Ceareny aman Ane Clearitg aa Aster Orn teecutes print soler dearing for srroothe paver treting 3 Select the paper source to clean Rear Tray or Cassette 4 Click OK Tar cleaning gaper teed radert Select the taget paper tource for Cleandeg and Pea chick 10K o a 5 Clean the Paper Feed Roller without paper 1 Follow the message to remove paper in the paper source you selected in 3 of step 4 2 Click OK The Paper Feed Roller will rotate as it is cleaned 6 Clean the Paper Feed Roller with paper 1 Make sure that the Paper Feed Roller has stopped rotating then follow the message to load three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the paper
79. the slider to the left makes the amount smaller It is recommended to set the slider at the second position from the right for most cases i Q H P important When you set the slider at the rightmost position the back side of the paper may become smudged 5 Complete the setup Click OK The data will be printed without any margins on the paper P important When a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing is selected the size is automatically changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing When High Resolution Paper T Shirt Transfers or Envelope is selected from the Media Type list on the Main tab you cannot perform borderless printing When Borderless is selected the Printer Paper Size Staple Side when Duplex Printing is not selected settings and the Stamp Background button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out and are unavailable Print quality may deteriorate or the sheet may be stained at the top and bottom depending on the type of the media used When the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data a portion of the image may not be printed depending on the size of the media used In this case crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size Note When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab borderless printing is not recommended and therefore the dialog box for media selection appears When you are using plain paper for test
80. this case Print the nozzle check pattern Check the printed check pattern to see if the nozzles are clogged See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Q A Page top Page 82 of 437 pages iP4700 series Advanced Guide Page 83 of 437 pages iP 4700 series Advanced Guide PA gt MC 4085 V1 00 A i BrE 4 Basic Guide Printing roubleshooting Printing from a Computer How to Use This Manual Printing with the Bundled Application Software E f What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing This Manual Printing Photos Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing on DVD CDs Selecting the Paper Changing the Machine Settings s P Printing Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX When you display this on screen manual in a language Selecting the Paper and Layout environment other than English Selecting a Photo some English descriptions may Editing be displayed Printing Printing a DVD CD Printing Calendars Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Printing Stickers Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Printing Layout Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Correcting and Enhancing Photos Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Using the Red Eye Correction Function iP4700 series Advanced Guide Page 84 of 437 pages Using the Face
81. vertically or slanted Tips on How to Use Your Printer Page 81 of 437 pages If the printer is used or transported vertically or slanted the printer may become damaged or ink may leak from the printer Be sure not to use or transport the printer vertically or slanted Tip Do not place any object on the Top Cover Do not place any object on the Top Cover It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Top Cover is open and cause the printer to malfunction Also place the printer where objects will not fall on it gt DY Tip Carefully choose the area to place the printer 4l v Place the printer at least 5 91 inches 15 cm away from other electrical appliances such as fluorescent lamps If the printer is placed closer to those it may not be able to work properly due to fluorescent noises m How to maintain the optimal printing quality The key to printing with the optimal printing quality is to prevent the Print Head from drying or clogging Always follow the following steps for optimal printing quality e Follow the procedure below to disconnect the power plug 1 Press the Power button on the printer to turn it off 2 Make sure that the Power lamp is not lit 3 Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet or turn off the extender cable connector If you press the Power button to turn off the power the printer caps the Print Head nozzles automatically to prevent from drying If you disconnect the power plug
82. wih the current settings Printing starts Preter Canon 1000 Copias Paper Sue AS Paper Sources Meca Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il Prnt Quality Duplex Prnthg Matora E Dordertess Preting the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Med Cop ia Type ies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced Printing Page 124 of 437 pages 3 Click Print ES Note See Help for details on the Print Sett
83. with absorbed ink 4 A H B When the ink A runs out the ink lamp flashes slowly to indicate that the ink is running low Then when the ink B runs out the ink lamp flashes fast to indicate that the ink needs to be replaced with a new one See Replacing an Ink Tank m Printing on special paper How to print with optimal quality Tip Check the printer status before printing e Is the Print Head ok If print head nozzles are clogged print will be faint and papers will be wasted Print the nozzle check pattern to check the Print Head See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Tips on How to Use Your Printer Page 80 of 437 pages e Is the inside of the printer smeared with ink After printing large quantities of paper or performing borderless printing the area where papers go through may get smeared with ink Clean the inside of your printer with Bottom Plate Cleaning Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Tip Check how to load the paper correctly e Is the paper loaded in the correct orientation When loading paper in the Rear Tray or Cassette make sure the orientation of paper Rear Tray Cassette To load paper in the Rear Tray load To load paper in the Cassette load paper with the paper with the printing side facing you printing side facing down e Is the paper curled The curled paper causes paper jam Flatten the curled paper then reload it Refer to Troublesho
84. your important photos Media Types Commercially available papers Plain Paper Approx 150 A4 B5 A5 Letter 8 5 Approx 50 Plain Paper Recycled paper sheets 3 x 11 Approx 150 sheets sheets 2 Envelopes 10 envelopes Not loadable 4 5 Envelope Canon genuine papers For printing photos Photo Paper Pro 5 Platinum lt PT 101 gt 6 A4 Letter 8 5 x 11 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm and 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm 10 sheets 4 x6 10x15 cm 20 Photo Paper Proll sheets Photo Paper Pro loadable 4 Platinum Photo Paper Pro II Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Glossy Photo Paper Photo Paper Glossy lt GP 502 gt 6 Glossy Photo Paper Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il lt PP 201 gt 6 Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss Semi gloss lt SG 201 gt 6 Matte Photo Paper Matte Photo Paper lt MP 101 gt For printing business documents Photo Paper Plus Media Types You Can Use Page 39 of 437 pages h High Resolution 80 sheets Not 50 sheets High Resolution Paper loadable 4 Paper lt HR 101N gt For creating your own prints T Shirt Transfers 1 sheet Not 5 T Shirt Transfers lt TR 301 gt loadable 4 Photo Stickers 1 sheet Glossy Photo Paper lt PS 101 gt 7 1 Paper with a Model Number is Canon genuine paper Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side and
85. 3 1 es ae e ee a W 2 1 o ss es ee I e es s ee s ee 2 ae ee ae E ee ee E 2 Ee De Oe 2 DE i JEN OI OON gt UNN e DME SNIN 4 E lt s SEE 00 unn s am x La gt s HEN s AME s TiN BININ 4 GE e ED 3 SINN x 2 M 2 gt es gt A DAMNN 1 EE 1 gt oR om a E a ia oa 2 M 2 2 2 ee gt Wi gt gt GE o D GE ee gt i a ee e ee EA Note If itis difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks E Less noticeable vertical white streaks F More noticeable vertical white streaks Page 340 of 437 pages Manual Print Head Alignment Page 341 of 437 pages 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column Q then click Send 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The third pattern is printed P important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress 7 Look at the third printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column a that has the least noticeable horizontal streaks E8 Note f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white streaks G Less noticeable horizontal white streaks H More noticeable horizontal white streaks 2 Repeat the procedure until
86. 420 of 437 pages Nelieirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Driver gt Installing the Printer Driver Installing the Printer Driver You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest Printer Driver for your model The procedure for installing the downloaded Printer Driver is as follows 1 2 Turn off the printer P important When you turn on the computer while the printer is on the Windows Plug and Play function is executed automatically and the Found New Hardware window Windows Vista or Found New Hardware Wizard window Windows XP Windows 2000 is displayed In this case click Cancel Start the installer Double click the icon of the downloaded file The installation program starts P important In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning Install the driver At the Welcome window click Next Read the contents of the License Agreement window After checking the contents click Yes Installation of the printer driver begins After
87. Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt About Solution Menu About Solution Menu Quick Shortcut Solution Menu Solution Menu is a menu window that provides quick access from your desktop to Canon applications manuals and online product information Canon Solution Menu ook wa Scanimport photos or documents amp Print photos or albums etc es One Click to Photo Print ya Print DVDICD labels fe Go to a web page with free and high Change settings or find solutions to s a quality materials a problems a ho your Canon product or ee esislarcaiee Login online Find information on Canon products amp How to Use This Screen Point to a button on the screen to display the description of each function To use a function click the corresponding button Click the butions on the tile bar to change the screen size V Start Solution Menu when Windows starts P important The number and types of buttons displayed in the window may vary depending on your printer and region Starting Solution Menu a Click Here Solution Menu AS To start from desktop see below Double click the Canon Solution Menu icon on the desktop Alternatively from the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Solution Menu gt Solution Menu From the next time Solution Menu starts when Windows starts If the Start Solution Menu when Windows starts checkbox at the bottom left of the window is n
88. Brightener Function Using the Face Sharpener Function Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Using the Blemish Remover Function Adjusting Images Correct Enhance Images Window Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from How Do Print with Even Margins What Is C1 or C4 Photo Print Settings Printing on a DVD CD Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Other Settings Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Borderless Printing iP4700 series Advanced Guide Page 85 of 437 pages Fit to Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Backgrou
89. Canon iP4700 series On screen Manual How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual Basic Guide Describes the summary of this product lt iP4700 series On screen Manual MC 4052 V1 00 p se Be Ped Chea Ji E E T aS T Ss Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Describes the detailed function of this product Page 1 of 437 pages iP4700 series Basic Guide Canon WHow to Use This Manual WPrinting This Manual HEPrinting on DVD CDs MP 3591 V1 00 Contents Overview of the Printer Main Components Printing Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Documents Windows Printing Documents Macintosh gt Other Usages Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device Useful Software Applications gt Loading Paper Loading Paper Page 2 of 437 pages iP4700 series a MlAdvanced Guide F Routine Maintenance Replacing an Ink Tank When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette Opening the Maintenance Screens gt Appendix Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Tips on How to Use Your Printer Overview of the Printer Page 3 of 437 pages BasicGuide E E Contents gt Overview of the Printer Overview of the Printer This section shows the component names of the printer and describes their functions Main Components Front View Rear View Insid
90. Correct Enhance 4 Click Digital Face Smoothing Red Eye Conecton 22 Face Brghtener 29 Face Sharpener Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to enhance then click OK that appears over the image Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Skin in and around the selected area is enhanced beautifully and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save enhanced images as new files ES Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for enhanced images 7 Click Exit P important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images Page top Page 164 of 437 pages Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 165 of 437 pages AJS Gilets Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Blemish Remover Function Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles 1 Select photos in
91. Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center e Check 3 Perform Print Head Alignment Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 379 of 437 pages gt Routine Maintenance EA Note Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Manual Print Head Alignment Page top Printing Does Not Start Page 380 of 437 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Does Not Start Printing Does Not Start Check 1 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in then turn the printer on While the Power lamp is flashing green the printer is initializing Wait until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green ES Note When printing large data such as a photo or graphics it may take longer to start printing While the Power lamp is flashing green the computer is processing data and sending it to the printer Wait until printing starts Check 2 Check the status of ink tanks Replace the ink tank if ink has run out Check 3 Open the Top Cover and check to see if the ink lamps are flashing red If there is still sufficient ink but its ink lamp is flashing red an ink tank may not be installed in a right position Routine Maintenance Check 4 Open the Top Cover and make sure that the ink lamps light up red If the ink lamp is not lit press the mark on the ink tank
92. E Note This printer has two kinds of black ink PGBK pigment ink and BK dye ink Check the nozzle check pattern then click Black if there are missing lines in PGBK or click Color if there are horizontal white streaks in BK For details on the nozzle check pattern see Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 4 Click OK The printer starts cleaning the Print Head deeply when the Power lamp starts flashing green Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the deep cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 2 minutes 30 seconds EE Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before cleaning the Print Head deeply Omp Charing Urctogs narsies that carte be cleared Sy regalar clearing Salet the target ith grous for dees cheating H you are mot sure of the iek group for desg cleaving execute Nozze Check 3 Deep clearing comwames mech more irk than regular ceasing Pxrcute choos choarergy ovy five mageh Katehi does nul imareve after reper chanrg Alter thre deep clearing ends ceecute Noezke Chert and check whether the print head rooziet hase been uiciogged eee a ee 5 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operation until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern 6 Examine the nozzle check pattern and click Quit on the Pattern Check dialog box See s
93. E9 Note f the automatic adjustment of the print head position has failed the Alarm lamp flashes Refer to Eleven flashes of Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above align the Print Head manually Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide To print and check the current head position adjustment values click Print Alignment Value O amp Page top Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Page 70 of 437 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller If the Paper Feed Roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it paper may not be fed properly In this case clean the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning will wear out the Paper Feed Roller so perform this only when necessary You need to prepare three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper Windows 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important If the Inner Cover is open close it 3 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 4 Select Roller Cleaning 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Roller Cleaning Co es A TPES py ee BT warg Bonon Pate Dearg rma even coe waen Sev
94. If there are horizontal white streaks in the pattern 2 Clean the print head nozzles of the Color ink group C M Y BK A B A Good B Bad Horizontal white streaks are present If there are missing lines in the pattern 1 and also there are horizontal white streaks in the pattern 2 Clean the print head nozzles of the All Colors ink group 2 Take the appropriate action When cleaning is not required Click Exit Windows or Quit Macintosh on the Pattern Check dialog box to exit the nozzle check pattern examination When cleaning is required Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 57 of 437 pages 1 Click Cleaning Windows Mren Cock AT Te OE DOr Oh PA OOO ROE Seade rT WCE of the ebay faltered dows the paraad pariere Pait chta cnbi o icf tl cc es i i tt Oi a joj a te P Tee prit beet recrks are coppi Ethe piwed putters reerties te peter ions eeen a nan a the aind gunners rmied Hai Du prira baad rassist naig be clogged mareen Ot Cres piers ves ons ene Sa prir Oek mes oat w swwcuwy Oc ha Fee yrna emer oea ro mma qey ater Caring Ethe sowed parers eea or irere mer Saami oa b m nats mme wey Min memg K man caled iao Dwe Dsn dnp cerns 2 Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette Follow the procedure from 3 in step 5 Windows or Macintosh in Cleaning the Print Head to clean the Print Head Go to Select the ink group to
95. Ink Tank Replacing an Ink Tank When ink runs out while printing is in progress the Alarm lamp will flash orange four times and the error message will appear on your computer screen Make sure which ink tank has run out of ink and replace it with a new one E8 Note When ink runs out or other errors occur the Alarm lamp will flash orange to inform you of the error Refer to Four flashes of Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide and take an appropriate action For information on the compatible ink tanks refer to the printed manual Getting Started If print results become faint or white streaks appear despite sufficient ink levels see When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect m Replacing Procedure When the ink tanks run out of ink follow the procedure below to replace them gt Important Handling Ink To maintain optimal print quality we recommend the use of specified Canon brand ink tanks Refilling the ink is not recommended If you remove an ink tank replace it immediately Do not leave the printer with ink tanks removed Use new ink tanks for replacement Installing used ink tanks may cause the nozzles to clog Furthermore with such ink tanks the printer will not be able to inform you when to replace the ink tanks properly Once an ink tank has been installed do not remove it from the printer and leave it out in the open This will cause th
96. K The confirmation message appears 5 Execute paper feed roller cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and click OK Paper feed roller cleaning starts 6 Complete paper feed roller cleaning After the rollers have stopped follow the instruction in the message load three sheets of plain paper into the selected paper source of the printer and click OK Paper will be ejected and feed roller cleaning will be completed Page top Aligning the Print Head Position Page 334 of 437 pages Advanced Gitels Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Aligning the Print Head Position Aligning the Print Head Position Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and lines This printer supports two head alignment methods automatic head alignment and manual head alignment Normally the printer is set for automatic head alignment If the printing results of automatic print head alignment are not satisfactory see Manual Print Head Alignment and perform manual head alignment To change to the manual head alignment click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab and then check the Align heads manually check box The procedure for performing print head alignment is as follows D Si Print Head Alignment Open the printer driver setup window Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab The Start Print Head Alignment
97. M is disabled in the application software ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data properly When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Color Correction appears grayed out and is unavailable Related Topics s gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Page top Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Page 271 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data When people print images taken with digital cameras they sometimes feel that the printed color tones differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor To get the print results as close as possible to the desired color tones you must select a printing method that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose Color Management Devices such as digital cameras scanners monitors and printers handle color differently Color management color matching is a method that manages device dependent colors as a common color space For Windows a color management system called ICM is built into the operating system Adobe RGB and sRGB are popularly used as commo
98. Name list and click Utility e608 Printer List s o x o Make Default Add Delete ColorSync Show info P4700 series Canon P4700 series Status Kind 4 Select your printer s name in the Product list and click Maintenance ean Printer List USB Type 4700 series Canon j Printer Cancel J tamtenance 1 The Canon lJ Printer Utility starts up Page top Sharing the Printer on a Network Page 428 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network Sharing the Printer on a Network When multiple computers are being used in the network environment you can share the printer connected to one computer with the other computers The Windows versions of the computers connected to the network do not necessarily have to be the same a N C LA Cent PC Client PC Client PC e Settings on Print Server The procedure for setting up a computer directly connected to a printer with a USB cable is as follows e Settings on Client PC The procedure for setting up those computers that will use this printer through the network is as follows When you execute print the data is sent through the print server system to the printer P important Incase an error occurred when a document is printed by the client system to a shared printer the error message of Canon lJ Status Monitor will be displayed both on the client system and the print server system For regu
99. Namegirlandlower jpg E8 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview E8 Note f only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview Auto Correction 3 Make sure that Auto is selected Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 160 of 437 pages 4 Click Face Sharpener Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener 5 Click OK The face is sharpened and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Correction 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Face Sharpener RS RedEye Comection Y 3 99 Blerneth Remove Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener Move the cursor over
100. Paper screen to boost the colors in a photo before printing _ Sdiect the printer to use then select the aze and type of paper for printing P important This function is available only with a printer that supports Vivid Photo This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box E Note Even if you select the Vivid Photo checkbox this effect applies only to the print result The original image or preview image will not be affected Page top Reducing Photo Noise Page 184 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Reducing Photo Noise Eroon Reducing Photo Noise When a photo is taken in a dark location such as night scene using digital camera noise may appear in the image Select the Photo Noise Reduction checkbox in the Select Paper screen to reduce noise in the image and make the printed photos more vivid Gorey Photo Poper Matte Photo Pacer P important This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box Note When the noise is severe change Normal to Strong The noise reduction effect applies only to the print result The original image or preview image will not be affected Page top Cropping Pho
101. Pret Qualty Wah Qaira BD oie Pian Paper Gaston Lecer 8 S11 215 2279 40m Color rtensty Ago Manual 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select ICM for Color Correction 6 Select the input profile Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data e For sRGB data or data without an input ICC profile Select Standard e For Adobe RGB data Printing with ICC Profiles Page 277 of 437 pages Select Adobe RGB 1998 P important a When the application software specifies an input profile the input profile setting of the printer driver becomes invalid When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer Adobe RGB 1998 is not displayed You can install ICC profiles from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the printer 7 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance of Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 8 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed with the color space of the selected image data Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quali
102. The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set scaled printing Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab B Page Setup gf Efecte J Martenance El Page Sze Letter 85x11 a Onertation a O Porat A unce B Prea Pacer Sze Letter 85x11 Page Lat Scaled uE Hag Nommal size FetoPage Page Layout 3 Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size select the page size that is set with your application 4 Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods e Select a Printer Paper Size When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced When the printer paper size is larger than the Page Size the page image will be enlarged Scaled Printing aan Man oo et Etocs Aj Martenance El Page Sze Letier 3 5711 gt Page Lagat Scaled a 4 8 Nomasize Bordetess Fat Page Scaled Page Layout te E Sang amp gt 22040 Ouples Parting ALNO Port Area Setup org ade stapling Leh Specty Mangr gt 1 995 yg E Part iom Last Page Colste Pag Options Stamp Background Oefauts cin Ee ema Gea e Specify a scaling factor Directly type in a value into the Scaling box SSS a i E Page Sze Letter 85x11 E amp Onertatio
103. Uninstall 2 Click OK when the confirmation message appears EA Note When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed click OK to restart your computer On screen manuals other than printer driver s help are uninstalled at a time 1 Select Applications on the Go menu 2 Double click the Canon Utilities folder and then the IJ Manual folder 3 Drag the folder of your printer s name into the trash 4 Drag the o Canon XXX On screen Manual icon where XXX is your printer s name on your desktop into the trash Page top Transporting the Printer Page 423 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Transporting the Printer Transporting the Printer When relocating the printer pack the printer using the original packing materials If you do not have the original packing materials pack the printer carefully using protective material and place it inside a sturdy box P important Do not transport or store the printer slanted vertically or upside down as the ink may leak and damage the printer 1 Turn the printer off 2 Confirm that the Power lamp is off and unplug the printer P important Do not unplug the printer while the Power lamp is lit or flashing green as it may cause malfunction or damage to the printer making the printer unable to print 3 Retract the Paper Support and the Output Tray Extension then close the Paper Output Tray 4 Disconnect t
104. a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras You can also print borderless photos easily Select the Kem you want to create from the menu Select LOrecy to access saved kams Ep amp Photo Print P important Easy PhotoPrint EX does not support Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me or Windows NT4 Easy PhotoPrint EX can only be used with Canon inkjet printers It does not support some printers including Canon compact printers SELPHY CP series Ifaprinter that supports Easy PhotoPrint EX is not installed you cannot print items you create f Easy PhotoPrint EX is installed on a computer that already has Easy LayoutPrint installed Easy LayoutPrint will be replaced by Easy PhotoPrint EX E8 Note Printing on paper larger than A4 is available with supported printers only See your printer manual for details See Help of Easy PhotoPrint EX for descriptions of Easy PhotoPrint EX screens Click Help in a screen or dialog box or select Easy PhotoPrint EX Help from the Help menu Help appears About Exif Print Easy PhotoPrint EX supports Exif Print Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers By connecting to an Exif Print compliant digital camera the
105. a Type Plain Paper Paper Size A4 1 Load paper into the cassette 2 Press the printer s RESUME button Plain paper of A4 Letter B5 and AS sizes will be fed from the cassette because Automatically Select is selected for Paper Sourcel in the orint dialoo box Status Name User When Completed Printing tee mah e In Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 If an Error Occurs Page 356 of 437 pages Error Number 1003 The following paper has run out Media Type Plain Paper Paper Size A4 1 Load paper into the cassette 2 Press the printer s RESUME button Plain paper of A4 Letter B5 and AS sizes will be fed from the cassette because Automatically Select is selected for Paper Source in the print dialog box _ C stopio Page top The Printer Cannot Be Powered On Page 357 of 437 pages Advanced Giitels Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt The Printer Cannot Be Powered On The Printer Cannot Be Powered On e Check 1 Press the Power button e Check 2 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the Power Cord Connector of the printer then turn it back on e Check 3 Unplug the printer from the power supply then plug the printer back in and turn the printer back on after leaving it for at least 3 minutes If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Page top Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Page 358 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide
106. able Status Monitor is selected on the Option menu of the printer status monitor 1 Open the printer properties dialog box s Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows 2 On the Maintenance sheet click View Printer Status 3 Select Enable Status Monitor on the Option menu if it is not selected Page top Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 404 of 437 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device The following are the possible errors that may occur when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant device and the countermeasures to clear them Note This section describes errors that are indicated on Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices The error messages and operations may vary depending on the device you are using For errors on non Canon PictBridge compliant devices check the status of the Alarm lamp and take the appropriate action to clear the error For details see Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange For the errors indicated on the PictBridge compliant device and their solution also refer to the instruction manual of the device For other troubles on the device contact the manufacturer Error Message on the PictBridge i Action Compliant Device Printer in use If the printer is printing from the computer or warming up wait until the job ends When it is ready the printer star
107. age 192 of 437 pages Page top Printing Photo Information Page 193 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Photo Information ae Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Printing Photo Information You can print the photo and the Exif information side by side To print them select Letter 8 5 x11 or A4 for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen and select Captured Info from the layouts in the Layout Print screen Note See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo This function is available only on paper sizes Letter 8 5 x11 and A4 Page top Saving Photos Page 194 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Saving Photos Saving Photos You can save edited photos The information of cropping and layout can be saved Click Save in the Layout Print screen Select the layat you wart lo part Check the Prenew and cick the Print button Preting starts SSRnRaela When the Save As dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save P important If you edit a saved file and save it again the file will be overwritten To save a file again with a new name or to a different location select Save As fro
108. also align the Print Head from the printer itself using the RESUME CANCEL button 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized supplied paper or Canon Matte Photo Paper MP 101 in the Rear Tray Load it with the printing side whiter side facing you in the Rear Tray 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open If the Inner Cover is open close it 3 Hold down the RESUME CANCEL button until the Power lamp flashes green four times then release it immediately The print head alignment pattern will be printed and the printer will adjust the print head position automatically Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the print head alignment pattern Vindows 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized supplied paper or Canon Matte Photo Paper MP 101 in the Rear Tray Load it with the printing side whiter side facing you in the Rear Tray gt Important You cannot use the Cassette to align the Print Head automatically Be sure to load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important if the Inner Cover is open close it Aligning the Print Head Page 67 of 437 pages 4 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 5 Adjust the print head position
109. also set page size and Orientation on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the paper size Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab WR ask Senso S Man B Poze Setur u tects if Martenance Page Lagat Noensleire g 1 m Ouples Parting Letter 85x117 li amp Orientation IA Pora A Langscape Rotate 180 degrees a B 4 Pign P aper Lemee 8 5x11 215 2794m Nomasie Bordetess FttoPoge Scaled Pagelmyot Staple Side Long side stapling Left Specty Margi 1 os We Yy E Pert home Lant Page Cox cance _ tov _ 3 Set Orientation Pact Options Samp Background Oetauts Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees 4 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be printed with the selected page size and the orientation Page top Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Page 226 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Default Setting Print from Last Page The procedure for specifying the number of copies and
110. ance button os Apply comections and erhancemerts in the renaing screen Exif Print a j E Styre a v P important The thumbnails reduced images displayed in the screen may appear as follows A black line appears along an edge of the image An edge of the image appears cropped However such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed and print results will not be affected 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures P important f Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from another application MP Navigator EX ZoomBrowser EX or Digital Photo Professional the folder tree area will not be displayed The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails 3 Click the image you want to print The number of copies appears as 1 below the clicked image while the selected image itself will appear in the selected image area E8 Note a To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click Selecting a Photo Page 110 of 437 pages E Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click in Delete All Imported Images To print two or more copies of an image click a Up arrow until the number of copies you want is reached To reduce the number of copies shown in the box click Di Down arrow You
111. ance tab The Print Head Cleaning dialog box opens Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Cleaning 3 Execute cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and then click Execute Print head cleaning starts 4 Complete cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message 5 Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To cancel the check process click Cancel If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem clean it once more Deep Cleaning Deep Cleaning is more thorough than cleaning Perform deep cleaning when two Cleaning attempts do not resolve the print head problem 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Deep Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Deep Cleaning dialog box opens Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Deep Cleaning 3 Execute deep cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and then click Execute Click OK when the confirmation message appears Print head deep cleaning starts 4 Complete deep cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message Cleaning the Print Heads Page 332 of 437 pages 5 Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To canc
112. and take an appropriate action See step 1 in Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Windows 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important if the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 5 Print the nozzle check pattern 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Nozzle Check Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 54 of 437 pages E ome amii innin a CE o Dege ro Pev 3 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern ES Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before printing the nozzle check pattern 6 Examine the nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important if the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the Canon lJ Printer Utility See Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utili
113. aper jams 1 Prepare paper See Prepare paper in Loading Paper in the Cassette Align the edges of paper If paper is curled flatten it 2 Load paper 1 Open the Paper Support and pull it out 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open 3 Slide the Paper Guides A to open them and load the paper in the center of the Rear Tray WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING YOU gt Important Always load paper in the portrait orientation B Loading paper in the landscape orientation C can cause paper jams B c Loading Paper in the Rear Tray 4 Slide the Paper Guides A to align them with both sides of the paper stack Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard The paper may not be fed properly 4 E8 Note Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark D E8 Note After loading paper Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Printer Paper Size or Paper Size and Media Type in the printer driver See Printing Documents Windows or Printing Documents Macintosh Loading Envelopes You can print on European DL and US Comm Env 10 sized envelopes The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope s direction by specifying with the printer driver properly gt Important You cannot use the following envelopes Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface Envelopes with a double flap or sticker
114. ased on the settings made at the time of Page 170 of 437 pages Correct Enhance Images Window Page 171 of 437 pages shooting Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results It is recommended that you normally select this setting Note Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images JPEG For Photo Print you can apply suitable corrections based on Exif information automatically by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox Red Eye Correction Corrects red eyes Note For Photo Print you can also correct red eyes by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox Face Sharpener Sharpens out of focus faces You can adjust the effect level using the slider Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can adjust the effect level using the slider Apply to all images Automatically corrects all the images displayed in the list OK Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections a
115. ation This feature is especially useful when printing low resolution images from Web pages The procedure for performing Image Optimizer is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set image optimizer Check the Image Optimizer check box on the Effects tab DR Qac Senp Man 23 Page Setup of Efects A Martenance Pan Paper Leter 85 11 215 3279 40m 3 Complete the setup Click OK The photos and graphics will be printed with jagged outlines smoothed ES Note Depending on application software or resolution of image data the image optimizer may have no discernible effects It may take longer to complete printing when the image optimizer is used Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 291 of 437 pages Page top Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 292 of 437 pages Adna aid Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration The Photo Optimizer PRO function corrects colors of digital camera images or scanned images It is specially designed to compensate for color shift overexposure and underexposure PASS The procedure for performing Photo Optimizer PRO is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Photo Optimizer PRO Check the Photo Optimizer PRO ch
116. ations to increase available memory If you still cannot print restart your computer and retry printing Printer driver could not be found Uninstall the printer driver according to the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver and then reinstall it Could not print Application name File name Try printing again once the current job is complete Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 399 of 437 pages Windows ne Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed If the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is installed a confirmation screen asking for permission to send the printer usage information will be displayed three months and then six months after the installation After that it will be displayed every six months for about four years Read the instructions on the screen and follow the procedure below a Thank you for your cooperation in Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program For development and marketing of products that better meet customer needs Canon requests that the information below recorded in your Canon product be collected on your computer and sent to Canon through the Internet Information related to Canon inkjet printer scanner fax OS version language and display setting information Device driver and appikation software usage logs Information related to Canon inkjet printer fax Printer s ID number Installation date and ti
117. ayed depending on the computer you use In this case wait for a while If you still cannot proceed to the next step follow the procedure below to reinstall the printer driver 1 Click Cancel on the Printer Connection screen 2 Click Start Over on the Installation Failure screen 3 Click Back on the screen that appears next 4 Click Exit on the PIXMA XXX screen then remove the CD ROM 5 Turn the printer off 6 Restart the computer 7 Make sure that you have no application software running 8 Insert the CD ROM again then perform Easy Install to install the printer driver e In other cases Follow the procedure described in your setup manual for proper installation If the driver was not installed correctly uninstall the printer driver restart your computer then reinstall the driver Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver If you reinstall the printer driver perform Custom Install on the Setup CD ROM then select IJ Printer Driver Windows ES Note If the installer was forced to be terminated due to a Windows error the system may be in an unstable condition and you may not be able to install the driver Restart your computer before reinstalling Page top Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Page 364 of 437 pages Nelifijecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Printing Speed Is Slow Hi Speed USB Connection Does Not W
118. ayscale Prreng 3 Select the print quality Select High Standard or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Printing with ICC Profiles Page 275 of 437 pages Click Matching tab and select None for Color Correction 6 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance of Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 7 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer uses the color space of the image data Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver and then Print Print from a program that cannot identity input ICC profiles or does allow you to specify one by specifying input ICC profiles from printer profiles of the printer driver When printing Adobe RGB data you can print the data with the Adobe RGB color space even if the application software does not support Adobe RGB 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the printer from the Media Type list on the Main tab Printing with ICC Profiles Page 276 of 437 pages aksep D Han E3 Page Setup of Btects Ai Mactenance Meds Type Plan Foper Li Paper Source Actcenateally Select
119. be deleted Select the title of the background you want to delete from the Backgrounds list on the Save settings tab and then click Delete Click OK when the confirmation message appears 3 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again lt Page top Printing an Envelope Page 257 of 437 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Printing an Envelope Printing an Envelope For details on how to load an envelope into the printer refer to Loading Paper in the Rear Tray in the manual Basic Guide The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows 1 Load an envelope into the printer Fold down the envelope flap Orient the envelope so that the flap is on the left and the folded surface is facing down and load in the rear tray lt 2 Open the printer driver setup window 3 Select the media type Select Envelope from Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab fi Commonly Used Setinga E Prete Prerio 4 Select the paper size Select Comm Env 10 DL Env Youkei 4 105x235mm or Youkei 6 98x190mm in the Envelope Size Setting dialog box and then click OK 5 Set the orientation Printing an Envelope Page 258 of 437 pages To print the addressee horizontally select Landscape for Orientation 6 Select the print quality Select High
120. box Select the checkboxes of the items you want to display and enter comments Set the size and color of font and position of the comments etc then click OK Note See Help for details on comments Page 213 of 437 pages Adding Text to Photos Text to Photos Gl sx Easy PhotoPrint EX E Adding Text to Photos You can add text to photos Click Al Add Text in the Edit screen and drag the mouse over the area in which you want to add text E Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create Est TetBbo S Tet Poston amp Size Color amp Lnes Anony of aree Ede abun as reed Create Abum fort foal a Ennis a y ow Sw ais RED io EC pe ME nn aom aag yart apen z ire Spacing Hapa Select Images Font Sye Ejga Maine DE Fie PSs Edit General Tre al _ Coe Leet a Print Settings ya A TA re sumer Order xj Aln Dstrbute es emo fess Cover Inside Pages Back Cover E s ES mi A mm i Select the Text tab in the Edit Text Box dialog box and enter text Note a Inthe Edit Text Box dialog box you can change the position angle and size of the text You can also set the color and line of the text box See Help for details To change the entered text select it and click Edit Text Box The Edit Text Box dialog box appears You
121. can change the order of photos using the list located at the top right corner of the screen You can select the printing order from Sort by Date and Sort by Name EA Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Selecting the Paper Page 111 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Selecting the Paper Easy Pour EX Selecting the Paper 1 Click Select Paper The Select Paper screen appears a Exif Print Gorey Photo Peper Matte Photo Paper 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Paper Source Paper Size Media Type ES Note The paper sizes and media types may vary depending on the printer See Help for details The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type E8 Note You can print directly on the DVD CD surface by selecting CD R for Paper Size gt Printing on a DVD CD You can print photos with more vivid colors or you can reduce the photo noise gt Printing Vivid Photos s gt Reducing Photo Noise See Help for details on the Select Paper screen O Page top Printing Page 112 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printi
122. can change the text Page top Page 214 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Adding Saving Page 215 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Saving Easy PhotoPrint EX SS Saving You can save edited items Click Save in the Edit or Print Settings screen Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create Check abum print sattngs Cick the Print button to print with the current settings Printing starts Pere coves Paper Sue Ad Paper Source Meda Type Print Qualty F Duplex Printing Qualky Settings 7 Autora EA Borderess Prezeg ICES When the Save As dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save P important If you edit a saved file and save it again the file will be overwritten To save a file again with a new name or to a different location select Save As from the File menu and save mm m Note Save will not be displayed in the Page Setup or Select Images screen Page top Setting Holidays Page 216 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled A
123. cation software Open the Printer Properties Dialog Box through the Start Menu Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning or to configure print settings that are common for all application software 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown below In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers 2 Right click your model name icon and then select Printing Preferences from the displayed menu The printer properties dialog box opens Important Opening the printer properties dialog box through Properties displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the Ports or Advanced tab Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences or application software About tabs regarding Windows functions refer to the user s manual for the Windows Page top Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh Page 425 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh You can open the Page Setup dialog box and the Print dialog box from the application program you are using Opening the Page Setup Dialog Box O
124. ce select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Correction 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Red Eye Correction a4 fat Redtye Comection oS Dipta Face Smoothing 99 Blemeth Remove Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Red Eye Correction Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Paintbrush 5 Drag to select the red area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 156 of 437 pages Red eye is corrected and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image E9 Note Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files ES Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for corrected images B 7 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Face Brightener Function Page 157 of 437 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Face Brightener Function Using the Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by br
125. ces the least noticeable horizontal streaks E8 Note f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white streaks C Less noticeable horizontal white streaks D More noticeable horizontal white streaks 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The second pattern is printed P important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress Page 336 of 437 pages Manual Print Head Alignment 6 Look at the second printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column H that has the least noticeable vertical streaks 1 a D os 1 1 os l a NIDI 1 oe A o 3 1M gt 1 2 a2 ot M o E 1 os sim z UN i IEN 4 RNIN a UBIN o s WEN BE x WN 2 M Em oma a 2 HM E8 Note f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks E Less noticeable vertical white streaks F More noticeable vertical white streaks 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column Q then click OK 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The third pattern is printed P important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress 7 Look at the third printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and sel
126. ch paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side Page top Lines Are Misaligned Page 370 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Lines Are Misaligned Lines Are Misaligned e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Perform Print Head Alignment If you did not align the Print Head after installation straight lines may be printed misaligned Be sure to align the Print Head after you install it Routine Maintenance E8 Note Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Manual Print Head Alignment Windows e Check 3 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog e Check 4 Is the Page Layout Printing performed or the Binding margin function used When the Page Layout Printing or Binding margin function is being used thin lines may not be printed Try thickening the lines in the document Page top Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Page 371 of 437 pages Advancedemde Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Printed
127. clean in Cleaning the Print Head _acintosh Go to Select the ink group to clean in Cleaning the Print Head O 0 A Page top Cleaning the Print Head Page 58 of 437 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Cleaning the Print Head m Cleaning the Print Head Clean the Print Head if there are missing lines or horizontal white streaks in the printed nozzle check pattern Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition Cleaning the Print Head consumes ink so clean the Print Head only when necessary You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper E8 Note Cleaning the Print Head without a computer You can also clean the Print Head print head nozzles of all ink colors from the printer itself using the RESUME CANCEL button 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Hold down the RESUME CANCEL button until the Power lamp flashes green once then release it immediately The printer starts cleaning the Print Head When the Power lamp is lit green after flashing the cleaning will be completed Print the nozzle check pattern to check the print head condition after cleaning See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Windows If you click Cleaning on the Pattern Check dialog box that appears after printing the nozzle check pattern See When cleaning is required the printer starts cleaning the Print Head Make
128. click ot Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Page top Printing an Index Page 189 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing an Index eS Easy PhotoPrint EX lt Printing an Index You can print an index of selected photos An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one page It is convenient for managing your photos To print an index select Index from the layouts in the Layout Print screen Select the layout you wart lo pent Check the Prenew aed cick the Print button Piring starts EEEF Bordetess Bordered h Pa aA Oo Budsedt l g P important Index print will be disabled if you select any of the following paper sizes Credit Card CD R You can print up to 80 images on one page ES Note See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order Example Index x20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box click ott Settings or select Pref
129. color profile setting of the application software E Disable the paper source setting of the appbcaton software Unt of Pare Data Processing Recommended 0K cei _ Onos i 3 Change the individual settings If necessary change the setting of each item and then click OK The Page Setup tab is displayed again Page top Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 347 of 437 pages AJS Gutels Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering a printing profile is as follows Registering a Printing Profile 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the necessary items From Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab select the printing profile to be used and if necessary change the settings after Additional Features You can also set necessary items on the Main Page Setup and Effects tab 3 Click Save DR Quack Senp lt Man 23 Page Setup of Btects Al Martenance Commorty Used Settings E E EA Prete Prrerg L T Business Document WD Paper Saving R Alana Addtional Features 2en Piring T donl Printing
130. confirm the print result select the Preview before printing check box Some software applications may not have a preview function You can specify detailed print settings on the Main sheet or Page Setup sheet For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide T Start printing Click Print or OK to start printing ES Note To cancel a print job in progress press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor After canceling the print job blank sheets of paper may be ejected To display the printer status monitor click Canon XXX where XXX is your printer s name on the taskbar If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head O Page top Printing Documents Macintosh Page 17 of 437 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Printing gt Printing Documents Macintosh Printing Documents Macintosh This section describes the procedure to print a document of A4 size on plain paper For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide EA Note Operations may vary depending on your software application For details on the operation refer to the instruction manual of your application m For Mac OS X v 10 5 x 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on See Front View 2 Load paper See Loading Paper Here we make sure that A4 plain paper is
131. current remaining is wwe tek Decale Aboest tek Upis Qa Check if any symbol A appears on the screen The ink with Ink low is running low You can continue printing for a while but we recommend you to have a new ink tank available E8 Note An error message may appear while printing Confirm the message and take an appropriate action Follow the procedure below to open each of the confirmation screens Windows 1 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 2 Click View Printer Status on the Maintenance sheet To confirm the ink tank information click the Ink Details menu E8 Note You can also display the printer status monitor by clicking Canon XXX where XXX is your printer s name which appears on the taskbar while printing 1 Open the Canon IJ Printer Utility See Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh 2 Select Ink Level Information in the pop up menu To confirm the ink tank information click Ink Details Checking the Ink Status Page 50 of 437 pages O A Page top When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Page 51 of 437 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect If print results are blurred or colors are not printed correctly the pint head nozzles are probably clogged Follow th
132. d File Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 137 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selact the Kem you want to create from the meny Selact LOrecy to access saved tems Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 138 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Se Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Stickers from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Specty paper sze etc n General Settings then selact a Byout After spectying paper sae atc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Ste Photo Suckers E prrt date Date Settings A Portrat AJ tandscape Euse the same mage n al frames 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Print date Use the same image in all frames ES Note Paper sizes other than Photo Stickers cannot be selected Select the Use the same image in all frame
133. d of Job Part of the Page Is Not Printed No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks s gt Lines Are Misaligned s gt Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Back of the Paper Is Smudged Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page top Cannot Print to End of Job Page 366 of 437 pages ASAT Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Cannot Print to End of Job Cannot Print to End of Job e Check 1 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog e Check 2 Is the space of your computer s hard disk sufficient Delete unnecessary files to free disk space Page top Part of the Page Is Not Printed Page 367 of 437 pages Ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Part of the Page Is Not Printed Part of the Page Is Not Printed e Check When performing automatic duplex printing the reason below is possible When performing automatic duplex printing the printable area at the top of the page will be 0 08 inches 2 mm narrower than the usual For this reason the bottom of the page may not be printed To prevent this select Use reduced printing from the printer driver P important
134. d only A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper in the Cassette Load other sizes or types of paper in the Rear Tray See Media Types You Can Use E8 Note We recommend Canon genuine photo paper for printing photos For details on the Canon genuine paper see Media Types You Can Use You can use general copy paper For the page size and paper weight you can use for this printer see Media Types You Can Use 1 Prepare paper Align the edges of paper If paper is curled flatten it E8 Note Align the edges of paper neatly before loading Loading paper without aligning the edges may cause paper jams f paper is curled hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite direction until the paper becomes completely flat For details on how to flatten curled paper refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Prepare the Cassette 1 Pull out the Cassette from the printer i 2 Remove the Cover on the Cassette 3 Pull the tab A towards you to unlock and extend the Cassette Loading Paper in the Cassette 3 Load paper 1 Load the paper stack WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING DOWN and THE LEADING EDGE TO THE FAR SIDE and align it against the right side of the Cassette 2 Slide the Paper Guide B to align with the mark of page size The Paper Guide B will stop when it aligns with the corresponding mark of page size E8 Note There may be a little spac
135. d then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed Error Regarding Automatic Print Head Alignment Is Displayed Writing Error Output Error Communication Error Error Number 300 Is Displayed Error Number 1700 Is Displayed iP4700 series Advanced Guide Page 87 of 437 pages Ink Info Number 1600 Is Displayed Ink Info Number 1683 Is Displayed Ink Info Number 1688 Is Displayed Error Number 1851 Is Displayed Error Number 1856 Is Displayed Error Number 2001 Is Displayed Error Number 2002 Is Displayed Error Number 2500 Is Displayed Other Error Messages The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device FAQs If You Cannot Resolve the Problem Instructions for Use Printer Driver Using Easy PhotoPrint EX About Solution Menu How to Use This Manual Page 88 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual How to Use This Manual Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Explanation Window s gt Printing This Manual Using Keywords to Find a Document Registering Documents to My Manual gt Symbols Used in This Document
136. dragging it in the Edit screen Select an image in the Edit screen then click 2l Free Rotate and drag a corner of the image to rotate it See Help for details on the position and size of images Page top Cropping Photos Page 207 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Cropping Photos al SAE Easy PhotoPrint EX S Cropping Photos Cropping an image is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the image by selecting the necessary portions Select the image you want to crop in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Click the Crop tab in the Edit Image dialog box Drag the portion within the white freme onto the area to crop Drag any square on the freme to resize the cropping area Gear Crop Drag the white squares on the image to change the area to be cropped and click OK Note See Help for details on cropping Page top Framing Photos Page 208 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Framing Photos Framing Photos You can add frames to images P important a You cannot add frames to images in Photo Print Stickers and Layout Print Select the image you want to frame in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double cl
137. e Print Head may overheat ES Note Opening the Top Cover while printing moves the Print Head Holder to the right Close the Top Cover and reopen it after printing finishes Page top Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 386 of 437 pages Wellpiesel gida Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Does Not Feed Properly e Check 1 Make sure of the following when you load paper e When loading two or more sheets of paper flip through the paper before loading e When loading two or more sheets of paper align the edges of the sheets before loading e When loading two or more sheets of paper make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper load limit However proper feeding of paper may not be possible at this maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions either very high or low temperature and humidity In such cases reduce the sheets of paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load limit Always load the paper in portrait orientation either in the Rear Tray or the Cassette regardless of the printing orientation e When you load the paper on the Rear Tray load the paper with the print side facing UP and slide the Paper Guides to align with the both sides of the paper When loading paper in the Cassette load the paper with the print side facing DOWN Align the right edge of the paper stack against the right edge of the Cassette and s
138. e Printed list 2 Select the documents to be printed From the Documents to Be Printed list select the title check boxes of the documents to be printed Note Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 3 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary 4 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 5 Execute print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents with selected check boxes are printed Print All Documents You can print all documents of the on screen manual 1 From Select Target select All Documents The titles of all documents are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list and the check boxes are automatically selected Note When you uncheck the check box of a document title that document is not printed Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 2 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple prin
139. e Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon lJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Preview Updating the Printer Driver Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Before Installing the Printer Driver Installing the Printer Driver Appendix Deleting the Undesired Print Job Sharing the Printer on a Network Canon IJ Printer Driver Page 298 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver Canon IJ Printer Driver The Canon lJ printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this printer The Canon lJ printer driver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your printer can understand and sends the converted data to the printer Because different models support different print data formats you need a Canon lJ printer driver for the specific model you are using How to Use Printer Driver Help You can display the Help describing the driver setting items through the printing preferences screen of the Canon lJ printer driver e To view all descriptions of a tab Click the Help button on each tab A dialog box opens displaying a description of each item on the tab You can also click the link found in the description of an item to display a description of the linked dialog box e To see a description
140. e View A Page top Main Components Page 4 of 437 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Overview of the Printer gt Main Components Main Components m Front View Rear View Inside View m Front View 8 7 6 5 1 Top Cover Open to replace the ink tanks or remove jammed paper inside the printer 2 Paper Guides Slide to align with both sides of the paper stack 3 Rear Tray Load photo paper or envelopes which you can use on the printer Two or more sheets of the same size and type of paper can be loaded at the same time and fed automatically one sheet at a time See Loading Paper 4 Paper Support Open and pull out to load paper in the Rear Tray 5 Cassette Load A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper and insert it into the printer Two or more sheets of the same size of plain paper can be loaded at the same time and fed automatically one sheet at a time See Loading Paper 6 Direct Print Port Connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera to print directly See Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device A Warning Do not connect any equipment other than PictBridge compliant devices to the Direct Print Port of the printer This may cause fire electric shock or damage to the printer Main Components gt Important Do not touch the metal casing 7 Paper Output Tray Printed paper is ejected Open it fully before printing 8 Output Tray Extensi
141. e area e For Date Time User Name the creation date time and user name of the printed object are displayed in Stamp Text If necessary change the settings of TrueType Font Style Size and Outline You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color P important Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable when Date Time User Name is selected e Placement tab Select the stamp position from the Position list You can also select Custom from the Position list and specify coordinates for X Position and Y Position You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp in the preview window To change the stamp position angle type a value in the Orientation box directly 5 Save the stamp Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box and then click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 6 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Stamp list Changing and Registering Some of Stamp Settings 1 Select the stamp for which the settings are to be changed Check the Stamp check box in the Stamp Background dialog box and then select the title of the stamp to be changed from the Stamp list Page 252 of 437 pages Registering a Stamp 2 Click Define Stamp The Stamp Settings dialog box opens Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window Overwrite save the stamp Click Save overwrite o
142. e area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image The entire image is corrected so that the selected area containing the face becomes brighter and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image EA Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area a Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for corrected images 7 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 159 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Face Sharpener Function Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out of focus faces in a photo You can perform the Face Sharpener function either automatically or manually 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears J Auto Photo Fix a RedEye Conection 22 Face Shapenet of Digtal Face Smoothing En CAUrer User
143. e between the Paper Guide B and the paper stack 3 Slide the Paper Guide C on the left to align completely with the side of the paper stack E8 Note Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark D Page 31 of 437 pages Loading Paper in the Cassette 4 Set the Cover on the Cassette 5 Insert the Cassette into the printer Push the Cassette all the way into the printer E9 Note The Cassette will stick out of the printer but do not force it into the printer any further This can damage the printer or Cassette 4 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open E8 Note After loading paper Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Printer Paper Size or Paper Size and Media Type in the printer driver See Printing Documents Windows or Printing Documents Macintosh 9 Page 32 of 437 pages Loading Paper in the Cassette Page 33 of 437 pages A Page top Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page 34 of 437 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper in the Rear Tray m Loading Paper in the Rear Tray You can load photo paper or envelopes in the Rear Tray Loading Photo Paper gt Important f you cut plain paper into small size such as 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm or 2 16 x 3 58 55 0 x 91 0 mm Card size to perform trial print it can cause p
144. e device Refer to the device s instruction manual Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 322 of 437 pages 5 Specify the print settings such as the paper type and layout You can perform settings using the menu on the LCD of your PictBridge compliant device Select the size and type of paper that you loaded in the printer Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device 6 Start printing from your PictBridge compliant device P important Never disconnect the USB cable during printing unless when explicitly allowed to by the PictBridge compliant device When disconnecting the USB cable between the PictBridge compliant device and printer follow the instructions given in the device s instruction manual Page top About PictBridge Print Settings Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt About PictBridge Print Settings About PictBridge Print Settings Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device This section describes the PictBridge function of the printer For the print settings on a PictBridge compliant device refer to the instructions given in the device s instruction manual ES Note In the following description names of setting items are given according to those used in Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices Setting item names may be different depending on the brand or model of your device Some setti
145. e ink tank to dry out and the printer may not operate properly when it is reinstalled To maintain optimal printing quality use an ink tank within six months of first use E8 Note Color ink may be consumed even when printing a black and white document or when black and white printing is specified Every ink is also consumed in the standard cleaning and deep cleaning of the Print Head which may be necessary to maintain the printer s performance When an ink tank is out of ink replace it immediately with a new one 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and open the Paper Output Tray gently 2 Open the Top Cover The Print Head Holder moves to the replacement position Replacing an Ink Tank Caution Do not hold the Print Head Holder to stop or move it forcibly Do not touch the Print Head Holder until it stops completely gt Important Do not place any object on the Top Cover It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Top Cover is opened and cause the printer to malfunction Do not touch the metallic parts or other parts inside the printer If the Top Cover is left open the Print Head Holder moves to the right In this case close and reopen the Top Cover Do not open the Inner Cover A when replacing the ink tank If the Inner Cover A is open after replacing the ink tank be sure to close it E8 Note The printer may make operating noise when the Print Head Holder moves to the replacement po
146. e procedure below to print the nozzle check pattern check the print head nozzle condition then clean the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory aligning the Print Head may improve print quality gt Important Do not rinse or wipe the Print Head and ink tanks This can cause trouble with the Print Head and ink tanks ES Note Before performing maintenance Open the Top Cover and make sure that all lamps on the ink tanks are lit red If not see Checking the Ink Status and take an appropriate action Increasing the print quality in the printer driver settings may improve the print result For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide When the Print Results Are Blurred or Uneven Step 1 See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern lt If there are missing lines or horizontal white streaks in the After cleaning the Print Head print pattern and examine the nozzle check pattern See Cleaning the Print Head If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice Step 3 See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply ES Note When you have performed the procedure until step 3 and the problem has not been resolved turn off the power and clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours If the problem is still not resolved the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center When the Print Resu
147. e the pages together to create a poster Printing Only Specific Pages If ink becomes faint or runs out during printing you can reprint specific pages by following the procedure below 1 Set the print range In the settings preview on the left of the Page Setup tab click the pages that do not need to be printed The pages that were clicked are deleted and only the pages to be printed are displayed Poster Printing Page 242 of 437 pages Canca El Page Sze Letter 85x11 gt amp Orientation Al Powe A Langecape Rotate 180 degrees i B Prr Pocee Sae Lener 85x11 Page Layout Poster E S 2 H Pisin Paper Lezer 85x11 215 279 der Bordetess FetoPage Scaled Pagelaot EE g m Sons 1 gt 1 995 E8 Note Click the deleted pages to display them again Right click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages 2 Complete the setup After completing the page selection click OK When you execute print only specified pages will be printed P important When Poster is selected the Duplex Printing Staple Side and Print from Last Page appear grayed out and are unavailable Since poster printing enlarges the document when printing it the print results may become coarse Page top Booklet Printing Page 243 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Meth
148. e top Adjusting Brightness Page 280 of 437 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Brightness You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate colors The following sample shows the print result when the brightness specification is changed Light is selected Normal is selected Dark is selected The procedure for adjusting brightness is as follows You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set Canca TB Case Sep D Han 3 Page Setup of Etects Al Martenance Meds Tipe Pian Peper l9 Paper Source Atomanoaly Select z Pere Quaity Pign Paper Leter 85x11 215 S275 den The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Specify the brightness Select Light Normal or Dark for Brightness and click OK Adjusting Brightness Page 281 of 437 pages ABCDEF 1234567 bots Nomai Sample Type Sandard Fe
149. eck box on the Effects tab FR sek Seno E Man 5B Page Setup of Efect Ah Martenance Normally there is no need to check the Apply Throughout Page check box Images within each page are optimized on an image by image basis ES Note Check the Apply Throughout Page check box when printing image data that has been processed such as being cropped or rotated In this case the entire page will be treated as a single image to be optimized 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the images will be printed with color compensation Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 293 of 437 pages P important Photo Optimizer PRO does not function when Background is set in the Stamp Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab Define Stamp is selected in the Stamp Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab and the bitmapped stamp is configured Note Depending on images the Photo Optimizer PRO may have no discernible effect Page top Reducing Photo Noise Page 294 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Reducing Photo Noise Reducing Photo Noise With the Photo Noise Reduction function you can reduce the digital camera noise and improve the image quality of the digital print The procedure for performing Photo Noise Reduction is a
150. ect the number of the pattern in column a that has the least noticeable horizontal streaks Page 337 of 437 pages Manual Print Head Alignment 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column j then click OK EA Note If itis difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white streaks G Less noticeable horizontal white streaks H More noticeable horizontal white streaks 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK _acintosh 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 Load three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray and extend the Output Tray Extension 4 Print the pattern 1 a A wo NY Open the Canon IJ Printer Utility dialog box s gt Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Select Custom Settings in the pop up menu Select the Align heads manually check box then click Send Confirm the displayed message and click OK Select Test Print in the pop up menu Page 338 of 437 pages Manual Print Head Alignment 6 Click Print Head Alignment 7 Confirm the displayed message and click Align Print Head The dialog for entering a print head alignment value is displayed P important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress E8 Note To confirm the current setting click Print Alignment Value and print the pattern 5 L
151. ectly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device You can connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera camcorder or mobile phone connect to the printer using a USB cable recommended by the device s manufacturer and print recorded images directly without using a computer E8 Note When printing photos with the PictBridge compliant device connected to the printer we recommend the use of the AC adapter supplied with the device If you are using the device battery be sure to charge it fully Depending on the model or brand of your device you may have to select a print mode compliant with PictBridge before connecting the device You may also have to turn on the device or select Play mode manually after connecting the device to the printer Perform necessary operations on the PictBridge compliant device before connecting it to this printer according to instructions given in the device s instruction manual Make sure that the printer is turned on Load paper Make sure that the PictBridge compliant device is turned off Connect the PictBridge compliant device to the printer using a USB cable A recommended by the device s manufacturer The PictBridge compliant device turns on automatically If your device does not turn on automatically turn it on manually When printer is correctly connected to the device the message that the printer is connected will be displayed on the LCD of th
152. el the check process click Cancel P important Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer s ink supply Consequently perform cleaning only when necessary Note If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning switch off the printer wait 24 hours and then perform Deep Cleaning again If there is still no sign of improvement the ink may have run out or the print head may be worn For details on the remedial action to be taken see Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Related Topic sb Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page top Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Page 333 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleans the paper feed roller Perform feed roller cleaning when there are paper particles sticking to the paper feed roller and paper is not fed properly The procedure for performing the feed roller cleaning is as follows z Roller Cleaning Prepare the printer Remove all sheets of paper from the paper source from which paper could not be properly fed N Open the printer driver setup window o Click Roller Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Roller Cleaning dialog box opens 4 Select Rear Tray or Cassette and click O
153. end the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important if the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the Canon IJ Printer Utility See Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh 5 Clean the Print Head 1 Make sure that Cleaning is selected in the pop up menu 2 Click Cleaning eo Canan Deets itokty 24200 seriet Cirrnates utwarted muigas and lines in the print senat Deep Clearing Unciogs sozie that cannat be cleared by regular Bonar Ane Clarirg Preven paper emaecoe during printing Aster Dearg oR teevutes print soler dearing for arrouther pase feeding 3 Select the ink group to clean E8 Note This printer has two kinds of black ink PGBK pigment ink and BK dye ink Check the nozzle check pattern then click Black if there are missing lines in PGBK or click Color if there are horizontal white streaks in BK For details on the nozzle check pattern see Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 4 Click OK The printer starts cleaning the Print Head when the Power lamp starts flashing green Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 1 minute 30 seconds ES Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before cleaning the Print Head Cleaning the Print Head Charing Cleare clogged print head narzien Select the target ink group for cleaning if you are not sare of the ink Ween
154. envelopes may not be fed properly Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page 37 of 437 pages B C B Rear side C Address side 3 Specify the settings in the printer driver Windows 1 Select Envelope in Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup sheet 2 Select DL Env or Comm Env 10 in the Envelope Size Setting window 3 Select Landscape in Orientation __acintosh 1 Select Envelope in Media Type 2 Select DL Envelope or 10 Envelope in Paper Size 3 Select the landscape orientation in Orientation gt Important If you do not specify the envelope size or orientation properly the address will be printed upside down or will be turned to 90 degrees E8 Note In Windows if the print result is upside down open the printer driver setup window select Envelope in Commonly Used Settings then select the Rotate 180 degrees check box in Additional Features For details on the printer driver settings see Printing Documents Windows or Printing Documents Macintosh 90 A Page top Media Types You Can Use Page 38 of 437 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Media Types You Can Use m Media Types You Can Use Choose paper suitable for printing for the best print results Canon provides you various types of paper to enhance the fun of printing such as stickers as well as papers for photo or document We recommend the use of Canon genuine paper for printing
155. er Cover is even slightly open m Overview of the Printer Check 8 Clean the Paper Feed Roller Routine Maintenance EA Note Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller will wear the roller so perform this procedure only when necessary Check 9 If two or more sheets of paper feed from the Cassette at once clean the inside of the Cassette For information on cleaning the inside of the Cassette refer to Routine Maintenance Check 10 Is the Rear Cover closed completely Paper may be jammed if the Rear Cover is not closed completely Push the Rear Cover until it is closed completely Refer to Overview of the Printer for the position of the Rear Cover Page top Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver Page 388 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver Windows e Check Is the paper source setting inconsistent between the application program and the printer driver Change the application software setting corresponding to the printer driver setting or click the Print Options on the Page Setup sheet in the printer driver and select Disable the paper source setting of the application software on the Print Options screen When the paper source setting is inconsistent between an application program and the printer driver
156. er Driver gt Canon IJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon lJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the progress of printing on the Windows screen You will know the status of the printer with graphics icons and messages Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon lJ Status Monitor launches automatically when data is sent to the printer When launched the Canon lJ Status Monitor appears as a button on the task bar Ea Note a To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing open the printer driver setup window and click View Printer Status on the Maintenance tab When Errors Occur The Canon lJ Status Monitor is automatically displayed if an error occurs e g if the printer runs out of paper or if the ink is low 1 Load paper into the cassette 2 Press the parter s RESUNE bution E Eror Persist Plain paper of A4 Letter B5 and AS szes wil be fed from the cassette because Asomatcally Select is selected for Paper Source in the perter diver In such cases take the appropriate action as described Page top Canon IJ Preview Page 302 of 437 pages AJAS Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon IJ Preview Canon IJ Preview The Canon lJ Preview is an application software that display
157. eraty 0 View Cole Patter a 5 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed at the specified brightness Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method gt Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance s gt Adjusting Intensity m Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Intensity Page 282 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Intensity You can dilute brighten or intensify darken the colors of the overall image data during printing When you want to sharpen the print results you should intensify the colors The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more intense when the image data is printed No adjustment Higher Intensity The procedure for adjusting intensity is as follows You can also set intensity on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity on the Main tab and click Set f e Canon iP4700 series Printing Preferences Mods Tipe Pla
158. erences from the File menu Printing an Index Page 190 of 437 pages Page top Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Page 191 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Easy PhotoPrint EX Se Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print You can print a variety of ID photos P important The photo may not qualify as an official ID photo depending on its use For details contact the party to whom you will be submitting the photo To print ID photos select 4 x6 10x15cm for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen and select a layout of the ID photo from the layouts in the Layout Print screen Select the layout you wart lo pent Check the Preview aed cick the Print taiton Piring tarts S amp Rneeie E Note See the following section for details on how to select photos Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order Example ID Photo 3 5x4 5cm 135 2 4 6 a You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box click Settings or select Preferences from the File menu a D photos can only be printed on 4 x6 10x15cm paper Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print P
159. ers rane muen srg preme oe art ee 3 Select the paper source to clean Rear Tray or Cassette 4 Click OK Meng ae inte Sales the target paper owe for caang and ren cick OK 4 Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Page 71 of 437 pages 5 Clean the Paper Feed Roller without paper 1 Follow the message to remove paper in the paper source you selected in 3 of step 4 2 Click OK The Paper Feed Roller will rotate as it is cleaned 6 Clean the Paper Feed Roller with paper 1 Make sure that the Paper Feed Roller has stopped rotating then follow the message to load three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the paper source you selected in 3 of step 4 2 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The printer starts cleaning The cleaning will be completed after the paper is ejected Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the Paper Feed Roller 3 When the completion message appears click OK E8 Note If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Roller in the Rear Tray follow the procedure below 1 Turn off the power and unplug the power cord 2 Rotate and clean the Paper Feed Roller A located in the center inside the Rear Tray with the moistened cotton swab or the like in the direction of the arrow B Do not touch the Paper Feed Roller with your fingers Be sure to use the cotton swab or the like to rotate
160. es in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action METT ink Info Number 1683 Is Displayed Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 398 of 437 pages e See Thirteen flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action MED ink into Number 1688 Is Displayed e See Sixteen flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action _acintosh Error Number 1851 Is Displayed e Check Close the Inner Cover then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer MD Error Number 1856 Is Displayed e Check Close the Inner Cover then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer A page of print data being sent at the time of the error will be erased so print that page again ME Error Number 2001 Is Displayed e See Nine flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action MD Error Number 2002 Is Displayed e See Nineteen flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action MET Error Number 2500 Is Displayed e See Eleven flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action M other Error Messages e Check If an error message is displayed outside the printer status monitor check the following e Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory Quit other running applic
161. ess Printing is not available for legal A5 or B5 sized paper or envelopes e Depending on the type of paper Borderless Printing may reduce the print quality at the top and bottom edges of the paper or cause these parts to become smudged When performing Automatic Duplex Printing the printable area will be 0 08 inches 2 mm smaller at the top margin Letter Legal Envelopes s gt Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Page top Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Page 411 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Sze Printable Area width x heigh A5 556 X 7 95 inches 141 2x202 0mm A4 8 00 X 11 38 inches 203 2x289 0mm BB 6 90 x 9 80 inches 175 2x249 0mm 4 x6 10x15cm 8 73 x 5 69 inches 94 8 x 144 4mm 4 x8 10x20cm 3 73 x 7 69 inches 94 8x195 2mm 5 x7 13x18cm 4 73 x 6 69 inches 120 2x169 8mMmM 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm 7 73 x 9 69 inches 196 4 x 246 0 mm ide 3 73 x 6 80 inches 94 8 x 172 6 mm 40 12 in 3 0 mm 1 60 in 40 7 mm 0 20 in 5 0 mm _ aar in 37 4 mm t sf 0 13 in 3 4 mm 0 13 in 3 4 mm HEB Recommended printing area E Printable area Page top Letter Legal Page 412 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Letter Legal Size Printable Area width x height Letter 8 00 x 10 69 inches 203 2 x 271 4 mm Legal 8 00 x
162. eter Canon wox Copias Paper Sua Photo Stickers Paper Source Meca Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il Print Quality Ouplex Printing j Autocrat F Dordartess Preting __Prink Postion LERE mek 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings You can adjust the printing position in the Adjust Print Position dialog box To display the Adjust Print Position dialog box click Print Position You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print E8 Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Printing Page 142 of 437 pages Page top Printing Layout Page 143 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Layout You can add text to your favorite photos and print them in a varie
163. ettings Paper Sve A4 Sat Holidays Onentaton Portrat AJ Landscape Start from 3 Perod 1 month s 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Start from Period ES Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can add holidays to your calendar s gt Setting Holidays 3 Select a layout for Design If necessary make advanced settings on the calendar and set the background ES Note You can customize the calendar display font colors of the dates and days of the week position and size of the calendar etc Setting Calendar Display You can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it in the Change Background dialog box To display the Change Background dialog box click Background E Note Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 130 of 437 pages See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Selecting a Photo Page 131 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Selact rroges for alandar You lt an abo aid replace mages in the edking process To correct or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button Apply Corrections and enhancements in the resulting screen a H E
164. etup manual e Serial number please refer to the setup manual e Details of the problem e What you tried to solve the problem and what happened Page top Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page 407 of 437 pages WNeleiesel gia Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Instructions for Use Printer Driver Instructions for Use Printer Driver This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions Keep the following points in mind when using the printer driver Restrictions on the Printer Driver e Depending on the document type to be printed the paper feed method specified in the printer driver may not operate correctly If this happens open the printer driver setup screen from the Print dialog box of the application software and check the setting in the Paper Source field on the Main tab e With some applications the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be enabled In this case use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software e Ifthe selected Language in the About dialog box does not match the operating system interface language the driver screen may not be displayed properly e Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties If you change any of the items you will not be able to use the following functions correctly Also if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications that prohibi
165. for each item Right click the item you want to learn about and then click What s This Alternatively when the Help button is found at the right end of the title bar click that button and then click the item you want to learn about A description of the item is displayed Related Topic gt How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page top How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page 299 of 437 pages Velieirlecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows ES Note This guide mainly describes operations on the Windows Vista Operations may differ depending on versions of the Windows Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure printing profile when printing 1 Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use In general select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box 2 Select your model name and click Preferences or Properties The printer driver setup window appears ES Note Depending on application software you use command names or menu names may vary and
166. ftware gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors The Vivid Photo function allows you to print image data with vivid colors The vivid photo function emphasizes the colors in background sceneries while maintaining the human skin color natural By using this function you can make vivid hues appear even more vivid The procedure for performing Vivid Photo is as follows You can also set vivid photos on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Vivid Photo Check the Vivid Photo check box on the Effects tab Geb Canon iP4700 series Printing Preferences i G DR casck Senp E Main 3 Page Setup of Etects AJ Martenance g maz Letter 85x11 215 3273 mm Conce __ oy Helo 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with vivid colors Page top Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 290 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Smoothing Jagged Outlines Smoothing Jagged Outlines The Image Optimizer function allows you to smooth jagged outlines in photos and graphics that have been enlarged with your applic
167. g restrictions in Microsoft Word Microsoft Corporation e When Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver use Word to specify Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page 408 of 437 pages them e When selecting Scaled Fit to Page or Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab the selected printing function may not be effective depending on the version of Word If this happens follow the procedure below 1 2 5 6 Open Word s Print dialog box Open the printer driver setup window specify Page Layout on the Page Setup tab and click OK Without starting printing close the Print dialog box Open Word s Print dialog box again Open the printer driver setup window again and click OK Start printing e llustrator Adobe Systems Inc If bitmap printing takes effect printing may take time or some data may not be printed Print after unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print dialog box Page top Appendix Page 409 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Appendix Appendix s gt Printing Area Deleting the Undesired Print Job Updating the Printer Driver s gt Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Transporting the Printer Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh s Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Sharing the Printer on a Network Page top
168. g the Print Head and ink tanks refer to the printed manual Getting Started A Page top Printing Page 8 of 437 pages Basic Guide a P Contents gt Printing Printing This section describes the procedure to print documents or photos You can easily print photos taken with your digital camera by using Easy PhotoPrint EX supplied with the printer Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Documents Windows Printing Documents Macintosh For Mac OS X v 10 5 x For Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 amp Page top Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 9 of 437 pages Basic Guide E Contents gt Printing gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Print image data saved on your computer by using Easy PhotoPrint EX supplied with the printer This section describes the procedure to print borderless photos on 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper For details on Easy PhotoPrint EX refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Note The screens used in this section are for printing with Windows The operations are also the same for printing with Macintosh Install Easy PhotoPrint EX from the Setup CD ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled To install Easy PhotoPrint EX select Easy PhotoPrint EX in Custom Install 1 Prepare for printing 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on See Front V
169. g the printer power is as follows oO Power Off The Power Off function turns off the printer When you use this function you will not be able to turn the printer on from the printer driver 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Execute power off Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab When the confirmation message appears click OK The printer power switches off and the Maintenance tab is displayed again ___ Auto Power The Auto Power Off function automatically turns off the printer when print data has not been received from the computer for a specified period of time The Auto Power On function automatically turns on the printer upon reception of print data 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Make sure that the printer is on and then click Auto Power on the Maintenance tab The Auto Power Settings dialog box opens EA Note If the printer is off or bi directional communication is disabled a message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status If this happens click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer 3 If necessary complete the following settings Auto Power On Specifying Enable from the list will turn the printer on upon receipt of print data Auto Power Off Specify time from the list When this time lapses without any print data being received the printer is turned off automatically 4 Transmit the settings Click Send When the c
170. gt on the Inner Cover Removing the CD R Tray 1 Pull out the CD R Tray Attaching Removing the CD R Tray 2 Close the Inner Cover P important If the Inner Cover is opened you cannot print on paper as it will not feed properly Make sure that the Inner Cover is closed 3 Remove the DVD CD from the CD R Tray P important Do not touch the printing surface when removing the disc from the CD R Tray E9 Note Dry the printing surface sufficiently before removing the disc If you see printing on the CD R Tray or the transparent parts on inner or outer diameter of DVD CD wipe them off after the printing surface has dried e 12cm DVD CD 1 Remove the disc from the CD R Tray e 8 cm DVD CD Page 309 of 437 pages Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Page 310 of 437 pages 1 Remove the 8 cm CD R Adapter from the CD R Tray 2 Remove the 8 cm disc from the CD R Tray P important The CD R Tray cannot be used if it becomes warped Be sure to keep the CD R Tray on a flat place Page top Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Page 311 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs The CD R Tray supplied allows the printing of images on printable DVD CDs CD LabelPrint is bundled application software that allows you to edit and modify data
171. gt Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos Setting Calendar Display Setting Holidays P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited calendar It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again s gt Saving E Note Editing Page 133 of 437 pages See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Printing Page 134 of 437 pages Wee Gites Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Printing Printi 1 Clic The ng k Print Settings Print Settings screen appears 2 Set Check calendar pret settings Cick the Pring button to pring wth the current settings Printing starts Preter Copies Paper Sua Paper Source Meca Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il Pring Quaity Cupkex Printing the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Med Cop ia Type ies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic du
172. gt Trademarks Page top Operating the Contents Pane Page 89 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Contents Pane AJS SI Adanced Guide gt Preting from a Computer gt Printing win Oher Appication Software Overview of Me Printer Driver gt Canon U Prater Driver Canon lJ Printer Driver The Canon U printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this printer The Canon L printer Giver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your printer can understand and sends the converted data to the printer Because different modets support afferent print data formats you need a Canon U printer driver for the Specific model you are using How to Use Printer Driver Help You can display the Help describing the diver setting hems theough the printing preferences screen of the Canon U printer driver e To view all Gescripsions of a tab C ck the Help button on each tab A dalog Dax opens displaying a description of each hem on the tad You can aiso Glick the link found in the description of an tem 10 display a description of the linked Galog don To see a description for each item Right click the item you want to leam about and then click What s This Alternatively when the Help button is found at the ght end of Me Stie bar click that buzon and then click he fem you
173. h the new layout will be added until all the images on the frames is decreased pages with the current layout can be fitted If you change the current layout for the front or back cover to one that has fewer layout frames any image that does not fit in the new layout will be deleted starting with the last image that was added to the former layout page E8 Note a The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size Orientation or the type of page selected front cover inside pages or back cover a Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected Calendar Changing Layout Page 199 of 437 pages 001 002 003 004 005 Edit Took j 006 a E aa V Apply to all pages Baale ES EEE P important The layouts of all pages are changed to the selected layout All images that do not fit in the new layout will be collected on the last page E Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation Layout Print Si i h 001 Edit Tools EES C Apply to all pages gona P important f the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout the following will happen If the number of layout Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames frames is increased in the new layout If the number of layout Pages with the new layout will
174. he Correct Enhance Images window appears RedEye Conecton TT gt 22 Face Shapenet 2S Diza Face Smocthing Ea CA Uters User Name inendtjpg Selected 3 E8 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview E8 Note f only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview Auto Enhancement 3 Make sure that Auto is selected Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 163 of 437 pages 4 Click Digital Face Smoothing Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing 5 Click OK Skin is enhanced beautifully and the g Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the enhancement operation If you want to apply the enhancement to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Enhancement 3 Click Manual then click
175. he Protrusions Inside the Printer Page top Cleaning Page 327 of 437 pages ASAT Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer gt Cleaning Cleaning This section describes the cleaning procedure that is needed to maintain your printer P important Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials for cleaning so as not to scratch the surface Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the printer and cause problems such as print head blockage and poor printing results Be sure to use a soft cloth Never use volatile liquids such as thinners benzene acetone or any other chemical cleaner to clean the printer as this may cause a malfunction or damage the printer s surface Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Printer Page top Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer Page 328 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer gt Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer Be sure to use a soft cloth such as eyeglasses cleaning cloth and wipe off dirt on the surface gently Smooth out wrinkles on the cloth if necessary before cleaning P important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the printer Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials as this may scratch the surface
176. he photo print settings will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the settings It is recommended that you save the printed image if you want to print it again Saving Photos When you print on a bordered layout the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other How Do Print with Even Margins Note You can crop images or print dates on photos gt Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can specify advanced Photo Print settings number of copies print quality etc in the Preferences dialog box A To display the Preferences dialog box click f Settings or select Preferences from the File menu 1 See Help for details on the Layout Print screen Q Page top Creating an Album Page 114 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album Easy PhotoPrint EX Creating an Album Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own personalized photo album Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Changing Layout s gt Changing Background s gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions
177. he print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print Printing Page 149 of 437 pages EE Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Q Page top Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 150 of 437 pages Nelieiplesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can correct and enhance images Click P Correct Enhance Images in the Select Images or Edit screen or in the Layout Print screen of Photo Print You can make the following corrections and enhancements in the Correct Enhance Images window P important For Photo Print if you select Enable ICC Profile in the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box you cannot correct enhance images E8 Note See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window Auto Photo Fix This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Red Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash Using the Red Eye Correction Function Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background Using the Face Brightener Function Face Sharpener
178. he printer back in and turn the printer back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed e Check See Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing and take the appropriate action Error Regarding Automatic Print Head Alignment Is Displayed e Check See Eleven flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action RMS writing Error Output Error Communication Error e Check 1 If the Power lamp is off make sure that the power plug is plugged in then turn the printer on While the Power lamp is flashing green the printer is initializing Wait until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green e Check 2 Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately in the printer driver In the following instructions XXX signifies your printer s name 1 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege 2 Click Control Panel then Printer under Hardware and Sound In Windows XP click Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware then Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 click Control Panel then Printers 3 Right click the Canon XXX icon then select Properties 4 Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings Make sure that a port named USBnnn where n is a number with Canon XXX appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port s If the port setting is not correct reinstall t
179. he printer cable from the computer and from the printer and then disconnect the power plug from the printer 5 Use adhesive tape to secure all the covers on the printer to keep them from opening during transportation Then pack the printer in the plastic bag 6 Attach the protective material to the printer when packing the printer P important Pack the printer with the Print Head and ink tanks left installed in the printer EA Note Clearly label the box as FRAGILE or HANDLE WITH CARE Page top Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Page 424 of 437 pages Nelieiejecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows Open the Printer Properties Dialog Box through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure print settings when printing 1 Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use In general select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box 2 Select your model name and click Preferences or Properties The printer properties dialog box opens E9 Note Depending on application software you use command names or menu names may vary and there may be more steps For details refer to the user s manual of your appli
180. he printer driver is complete P important You may not be able to delete the printer driver properly from the Installed printer drivers list If this happens restart your computer and try again Page top Before Installing the Printer Driver Page 419 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Driver gt Before Installing the Printer Driver Before Installing the Printer Driver This section describes the items that you should check before installing the printer driver You should also refer to this section if the printer driver cannot be installed Checking the Printer Status e Properly connect the personal computer and the printer For details on connection instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started e Turn off the printer Checking the Personal Computer Settings e Terminate all running applications e In Windows Vista log on as a user who has the administrator rights In Windows XP log on as the computer administrator In Windows 2000 log on as a member of the Administrators group Ea Note a When an old version of the printer driver is already installed first delete uninstall that version For instructions on deleting the printer driver see Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Related Topics s gt Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Installing the Printer Driver Page top Installing the Printer Driver Page
181. he printer driver or change the port setting according to the interface you are using e Check 3 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the printer and the computer e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the printer directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again e Check 4 Make sure that the printer driver is installed correctly Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 397 of 437 pages Uninstall the printer driver following the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive and perform Custom Install and select IJ Printer Driver to install again e Check 5 Check the status of the device on your computer Follow the procedure below to check the status of the device 1 Click Control Panel Hardware and Sound then Device Manager If the User Account Control screen is displayed follow the on screen instructions In Windows XP click Control Panel Performance and Maintenance System then click Device Manager on the Hardware sheet In Windows 2000 click Control Panel System then Device Manager on the Hardware sheet 2 Double click Universal Serial Bus controllers then USB Printing
182. he printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 5 Clean the Print Head deeply 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Deep Cleaning Goes Bet _ p e 1 Saang bonon Pase Comey Semana uewase rasa ard Inet eves cane mae srg prere mmm e Derg Fotu Dearwng A NN E y ea roast por hetrg Coe toes ne 3 Select the ink group to clean deeply E8 Note This printer has two kinds of black ink PGBK pigment ink and BK dye ink Check the nozzle check pattern then click Black if there are missing lines in PGBK or click Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 63 of 437 pages Color if there are horizontal white streaks in BK For details on the nozzle check pattern see Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 4 Click Execute EA Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before cleaning the Print Head deeply sasas za j liee maen Rad erred e riem by gda sieg 4 5 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The printer starts cleaning the Print Head deeply when the Power lamp starts flashing green Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the deep cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 2 minutes 30 seconds 6 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes t
183. he printing of the nozzle check pattern 6 Examine the nozzle check pattern See step 1 in Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern If a particular color is not printed properly replace the ink tank of that color See Replacing an Ink Tank If the problem is not resolved open the Top Cover to confirm that the ink is remaining turn off the power then clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours If the problem is still not resolved the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center _acintosh 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important if the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the Canon IJ Printer Utility See Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 64 of 437 pages 5 Clean the Print Head deeply 1 Make sure that Cleaning is selected in the pop up menu 2 Click Deep Cleaning ADT Canan 8 Anetes iohte PA Ej Oum lt Uirinates utwarted rmudpas and linen in the priet sonst p Charing Unciegs sozzies that cannot be cleared by regular Gearing aman Pune Clearirg PIR prevents papar umsdges during prieting Asher Oravy PIS taroses print sober deaving for smoothe paser feeding On 3 Select the ink group to clean deeply
184. hich images are saved 2 Click the image to print The number of copies appears as 1 and the image you selected appears in the selected image area A You can select two or more images at the same time EA Note To print two or more copies click Up arrow to change the number of copies To cancel the selection click the image to cancel in the selected image area and click Delete Imported Image You can also use Down arrow to change the number of copies to zero You can also correct or enhance the selected image See Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX 3 Click Select Paper Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 11 of 437 pages 1 3 A 4 Select the loaded paper 1 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in Printer 2 Make sure that Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source ES Note For details on other settings for Paper Source refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 3 Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Paper Size and Media Type Here we select 4 x6 10x15cm in Paper Size and the type of the loaded photo paper in Media Type ES Note If you select A4 or Letter sized plain paper when Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source the printer feeds the paper from the Cassette If you select other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper the printer feeds the paper from the Rear Tray If you select the wrong
185. htness contrast sharpness blur and show through removal Reset Selected Image Cancels all adjustments applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied adjustments Save All Corrected Images Saves all the images that applied adjustments displayed in the list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Correct Enhance Correct Enhance Images Window Page 173 of 437 pages S Correct Enhance Images Auto Adjust e RedEye Coneetion Face Bogena 92 Face Shapenet ZS Week aij Stog Speedy He oes you worl to comect oS Dipal Face Soothing 99 Blevith Remover CAUsers User Name gitljpg Red Eye Correction Corrects red eyes You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to You can adjust the effect level using the slider E Note For Photo Print red eyes are automatically corrected when Enable Auto Photo Fix is selected in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox is selected To disable the automatic correction deselect the checkbox Face Brightener Corrects the entire image so that the selected facial area is brightened You can adjust the effect level using the slider Face Sharpener Sharpens out of focus faces You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to You can adjust the effect level using the slider Digital Face Smoothing
186. ick the image Click the Frame tab in the Edit Image dialog box C Apply to all images in the page Select the frame you want to use from Frames and click OK P important You cannot print dates on framed photos Note Select the Apply to all images in the page checkbox to add the same frame to all the images ona Framing Photos Page 209 of 437 pages selected page at one time Various frames are available on our website besides those saved in the application Click Search frames to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free Internet connection is required to access the website Internet connection fees apply This function may not be available in some regions Exit Easy PhotoPrint EX before installing frames Search frames will be displayed only if Album has been selected See Help for details on frames Page top Printing Dates on Photos Page 210 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Printing Printing Dates on Photos You can print dates on images Select the image you want to print the date in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Click the Date tab in the Edit Image dialog box fomeomecmecmecmnce fShow date Select the Show date checkbox Set the Text Orientation Position Font Size and Color then
187. ide When you want to change the setting select another value from the list Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the margin width and then click OK Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print duplex printing will be started Performing Duplex Printing Manually You can perform the duplex printing manually 1 2 3 Open the printer driver setup window Set duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box and uncheck the Automatic check box on the Page Setup tab R asno E Main 3 Page Setup of Etects AJ Martenance El Page Sze rrr o o Li amp Orertstion A Poses A Ungeape Rotate 120 degrees a a Pign Paper Lomer 85x11 215 273 4am Nomaisie Bordsiess Fttofage Scaled Page Layout Select the layout Page 246 of 437 pages Duplex Printing Page 247 of 437 pages Select Normal size or Fit to Page Scaled or Page Layout from the Page Layout list 4 Specify the side to be stapled The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best Staple Side When you want to change the setting select another value from the list 5 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the margin width and then click OK 6 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document will be printed on one side of a shee
188. ies Dialog Box through the Start Menu Click the Maintenance tab then Custom Settings Select the Align heads manually check box then click Send Confirm the displayed message and click OK In the Maintenance sheet click Print Head Alignment oa fF WwW DY Confirm the displayed message and click Align Print Head P important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress ES Note To confirm the current setting click Print Alignment Value and print the pattern 7 After the pattern is printed click Yes The dialog for entering a print head alignment value is displayed 5 Look at the first printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column A that has the least noticeable vertical streaks Manual Print Head Alignment ye amp n s Tor aesxkre fF 2 we ve ef E INE IWE W i ated bini iwe GL 8 ome Ers ee eke Oo Se hoe EET TAS 5 ir 4p avr or au I UII z tt Poet Eq t EA Note f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks MRIN UPANNIUANE B A Less noticeable vertical white streaks B More noticeable vertical white streaks 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column G then click OK For column F and G pick the setting that produ
189. iew 2 Load paper See Loading Paper Here we load 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper in the Rear Tray E8 Note Load A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Cassette and other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open 2 Start Easy PhotoPrint EX and select Photo Print 1 Start Easy PhotoPrint EX titra Double click gt Easy PhotoPrint EX on the desktop 2 click Here Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 10 of 437 pages acintosh Select the Go menu Applications Canon Utilities Easy PhotoPrint EX then double click Easy PhotoPrint EX EA Note Windows To start Easy PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu double click w Solution Menu on the desktop and click gt Print photos or albums etc See Solution Menu To start Easy PhotoPrint EX from the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Canon Utilities Easy PhotoPrint EX then Easy PhotoPrint EX acintosh To start Easy PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu click w Solution Menu in the Dock and click gt Print photos or albums etc See Solution Menu 2 Click Photo Print Note You can select Album Calendar Stickers etc besides Photo Print See Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Te DA re t en ee gt gt 3 Select a photo to print 1 Select the folder in w
190. ight background E8 Note a You can brighten dark photos caused by bright background automatically by selecting Auto Photo Fix If the correction had not been made sufficiently applying Face Brightener function is recommended gt Using the Auto Photo Fix Function 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears r RedEye Conection 29 Face Shxpenet os Diza Face Smocthing Ext CAUuert User Nome sareleDl jpg E9 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview EA Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance Using the Face Brightener Function Page 158 of 437 pages 4 Click Face Brightener Face Sharpener S Dipta Face Sancothenp Elerreth Remover E8 Note a Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Brightener a Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select th
191. image data at the time of shooting is used and optimized yielding extremely high quality prints Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX from Other Applications What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 104 of 437 pages Easy PhotoPrint EX can be started from other applications See the application s manual for details on the procedure for starting The Photo Print function is available with the following applications e MP Navigator EX Ver 1 00 or later e ZoomBrowser EX Ver 6 0 or later e Digital Photo Professional Ver 3 2 or later P important Easy PhotoPrint EX is subject to the following restrictions when started from Digital Photo Professional Menu does not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen Images cannot be corrected enhanced Image display order cannot be changed Edited images cannot be saved Options other than Enable ICC Profile cannot be selected for Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box Therefore you cannot use the Vivid Photo and Photo Noise Reduction functions The Album function is available with the following applications e MP Navigator EX Ver 1 00 or later e ZoomBrowser EX Ver 5 8 or later Supported Image File Formats Extensions e BMP omp JPEG jpg jpeg e TIFF tif tiff PICT pict pct Easy PhotoPrint image files epp P important When selecting an image if there is a TIFF file in the selected folder the image may
192. in height before printing This may improve the print result C C Printing side We recommend printing paper that has been curled outward one sheet at a time e Check 4 If you are printing on thick paper select the Prevent paper abrasion setting Selecting the Prevent paper abrasion setting will widen the clearance between the Print Head and the loaded paper If you notice abrasion even with the media type set correctly to match the loaded paper set the printer to prevent paper abrasion by using the printer driver Print speed is reduced if you are selecting the Prevent paper abrasion setting Deactivate the Prevent paper abrasion setting once printing is complete If not this setting remains enabled for all subsequent print jobs Windows Open the printer properties dialog box and in Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet select the Prevent paper abrasion check box and then click Send To open the printer properties dialog box see Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows __acintosh In the Canon IJ Printer Utility select Custom Settings in the pop up menu select the Prevent paper abrasion check box and then click Send To open the Canon IJ Printer Utility see Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh e Check 5 If the intensity is set high reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again If you are using plain paper to print images with high intens
193. ines colors position size etc Click Settings in the Page Setup screen of Calendar or select a calendar in the Edit screen and click Setup Calendar to display the Calendar Settings dialog box P important The Position amp Size tab is displayed only when the Calendar Settings dialog box is displayed from the Edit screen Note See Help for details on the Calendar Settings dialog box Page top Opening Saved Files Page 219 of 437 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Opening Saved Files Easy PhotoPrint EX Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 Click Library from Menu Selact the Kem you want to create from the menu Salac LOrecy to access saved tems The Open dialog box appears You can check files created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX by icon view only for Windows Vista or thumbnail view P important When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer 2 Select the file you want to open and click Open The Edit screen appears EA Note Easy PhotoPrint EX supports the following file formats extensions Easy PhotoPrint EX Album file el1 Easy PhotoPrint EX Stickers file el2 Easy PhotoPrint EX Calendar file e14 Easy PhotoPrint EX Layou
194. ing the CD R Tray supplied with the printer G is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray MEE Error Number 1002 Is Displayed e Check 1 Place the DVD CD on the CD R Tray properly Place the DVD CD on the CD R Tray properly then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Make sure that you are using the CD R Tray supplied with the printer G is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray e Check 2 Unrecognizable DVD CD may be placed Canon recommends that you use DVD CDs specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer e Check 3 Is the DVD CD on the CD R Tray already printed If you place a DVD CD on which has already been printed on the CD R Tray the CD R Tray may be ejected In this case change the settings of the printer driver and try printing again e Clear the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box in Custom Settings on the Canon lJ Printer Utility dialog box then click Send When printing is over select the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box and click Send Note If the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box is cleared printing may start without the DVD CD loaded Selecting the check box prevents the CD R Tray from getting dirty MTT message 1850 Is Displayed e Check Open the Inner Cover then place the CD R Tray properly Open
195. ings screen Q Page top Printing a DVD CD Page 125 of 437 pages AJEA Gtilels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing a DVD CD Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing a DVD CD Start Easy PhotoPrint EX and select DVD CD Label in Menu to start CD LabelPrint CD LabelPrint allows you to print DVD CD labels easily For details on how to use CD LabelPrint install CD LabelPrint and refer to the application s manual as follows From the Start menu select All Programs gt CD LabelPrint gt Manual P important DVD CD Label is not displayed in Menu if CD LabelPrint is not installed on your computer CD LabelPrint New ERLEA Fle Edt Iet Figge mae Postion Settings Yew Help lov vlel Ale aln oasa pes Je Ja z y kie am 2 ah Page top Printing Calendars Page 126 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Calendars Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own calendar using your favorite photos Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Changing Layout s gt Changing Background s gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos
196. int the nozzle check pattern to check the status of the Print Head Routine Maintenance e Paper of size other than A4 or Letter is loaded in the Rear Tray Press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error then load a sheet of supplied paper Paper For Print Head Alignment or A4 Letter sized Canon Matte Photo Paper MP 101 with the printing side whiter side facing UP in the Rear Tray For Automatic Print Head Alignment always load paper on the Rear Tray e The Paper Output Slot is exposed to strong light Press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error and then adjust your operating environment and or the position of the printer so that the Paper Output Slot is not exposed directly to strong light After carrying out the above measures if the problem continues after aligning the Print Head again press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error and then perform Manual Print Head Alignment Manual Print Head Alignment Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Thirteen flashes Ink level cannot be detected Fourteen flashes Ink tank cannot be recognized Fifteen flashes Ink tank cannot be recognized Sixteen flashes Ink has run out Nineteen flashes An unsupported USB hub is connected Page 360 of 437 pages The remaining ink level cannot be correctly detected The lamp on the ink tank flashes Replace the ink tank and close the Top Cover s gt Routine Maintenance Printing with an ink tank that was once empty ma
197. irst Check 1 Do the page size and media type settings match the size and type of the loaded paper When these settings are incorrect you cannot obtain a proper print result If you are printing a photograph or an illustration incorrect paper type settings may reduce the quality of the printout color Also if you print with an incorrect paper type setting the printed surface may be scratched In borderless printing uneven coloring may occur depending on the combination of the paper type setting and the loaded paper The method of confirming the paper and print quality settings differs depending on what you do with your printer ig print from a PictBridge compliant Confirm by using your PictBridge compliant device device m Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device To print from a computer conti by using the printer driver i i Printing with Easy Setup Check 2 Make sure that the appropriate print quality is selected according to the media type and printing data referring to the table in Check 1 Select a print quality option suitable for the paper and image for printing If you notice blurs or uneven colors increase the print quality setting and try printing again EA Note You cannot change the print quality setting from a PictBridge compliant device Check 3 If the problem is not resolved there may be other causes See also the sections below sb Cannot Print to En
198. ith ink causing the printout to become smudged Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the printer s gt Cleaning Inside the Printer Note To prevent the inside of the printer from stains set the paper size correctly Check 9 Set Ink Drying Wait Time longer Doing so gives the printed surface enough time to dry so that paper smudged and scratched are prevented Windows 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 Open the printer properties dialog box s gt Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows 3 Click the Maintenance tab and then Custom Settings 4 Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time and then click Send 5 Confirm the message and click OK Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 375 of 437 pages too 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 Open the Canon IJ Printer Utility s gt Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh 3 Select Custom Settings in the pop up menu 4 Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time and then click Send 5 Confirm the message and click OK e Check 10 Is the paper scratched by other loaded paper Depending on the media type the paper may be scratched by other loaded paper when feeding from the Rear Tray In this case load one sheet at a time Page top Back of the Paper Is Smudged Page 376 of 437 pages ASA AT Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Re
199. ity the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy causing paper abrasion Reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again Windows 1 Open the printer properties dialog box s gt Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box Windows ad Click Here Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the printer properties dialog box quit the running application software Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 374 of 437 pages 2 On the Main sheet select Manual for Color Intensity and then click Set 3 Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the intensity Mom 1 Open the Print dialog box s gt Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box Macintosh 2 Select Color Options in the pop up menu 3 Drag the Intensity slide bar to set the intensity Check 6 Is printing performed beyond the recommended printing area If you are printing beyond the recommended printing area of your printing paper the lower edge of the paper may become stained with ink Resize your original document in your application software Printing Area Check 7 Is the Paper Feed Roller dirty Clean the Paper Feed Roller Routine Maintenance ES Note Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller will wear the roller so perform this procedure only when necessary Check 8 Is inside of the printer dirty When performing duplex printing the inside of the printer may become stained w
200. ivid Photos gt Reducing Photo Noise gt Cropping Photos Photo Print s gt Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index s gt Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print s Printing Photo Information Saving Photos gt Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers sb How Can Move or Copy the Saved File s Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from Printing Photos Page 107 of 437 pages How Do Print with Even Margins Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 108 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selact the Kem you wanz to create from the menu Selack LOracy to access saved Roms Page top Selecting a Photo Page 109 of 437 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Selecting a Photo Easy PhotoPrint EX g Selecting a Photo 1 Click Photo Print from Menu The Select Images screen appears Select maget tot pinto pining To comect of eniance images chck the ComeclEni
201. k Hold To temporarily stop all the jobs in the list click Pause Printer After canceling the print job blank sheets of paper may be ejected If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head m For Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 E Note The screens used in this section are for printing with Mac OS X v 10 4 x 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on See Front View 2 Load paper See Loading Paper Here we make sure that A4 plain paper is loaded in the Cassette Note Load A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper in the Cassette and other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open 4 Create or open a document to print using an appropriate software application 5 Specify the page size 1 Select Page Setup on the File menu in your software application The Page Setup dialog box will appear 2 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in Format for 3 Select the page size of the loaded paper in Paper Size Here we select A4 4 Click OK Page 19 of 437 pages Printing Documents Macintosh Sergi Page Arivibetes 3 3 EELE Oriermanen ie Te le kale 1008 7 om CD 4 6 Specify the required print settings 1 Select Print on the File menu in your software application The Print dial
202. kbox 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears v v gt BS Conect enonce Images ox RedEye Conection 22 Face Shapenet os Diza Face Smcothing En C Users User Nameibeyandyrljpg E9 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview E8 Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 155 of 437 pages Auto Correction 3 Make sure that Auto is selected 4 Click Red Eye Correction 5 Click OK Red eyes are corrected and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image P important Areas other than the eyes may be corrected depending on the image Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at on
203. lar printing Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed only on the client system Ea Note Install the printer driver from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the printer on the print server system and each of the client systems according to the OS of each system You cannot share this printer with Macintosh computers Related Topic Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page top Settings on Print Server Page 429 of 437 pages Nelifielecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Settings on Print Server Settings on Print Server When you use the printer on a network set up the printer driver for sharing on the server system The procedure for setting up the print server systems is as follows 1 Install the printer driver on the print server system For details on installation instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started Select items from the Start menu as shown below e In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e In Windows XP select the start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers The Printers window Windows Vista Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes window Windows XP is displayed Click the icon for the model name of printer to be shared e In Windows Vis
204. lect Fit to Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab a meje m j Prafarances Ga TR ask Senp E Man B Page Setu uf Eocts AJ Martenance El Page Sze Lotier 85x117 gt Onertstion A Poway A ncp s Rotate 130 dogees B PerPo Sce Later 85 5 Page Lyo Ft4o Page D Bs Nomalsine Bordeless Scaled Page Layout 3 Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size select the page size that is set with your application 4 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list When the Printer Paper Size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced When the Printer Paper Size is larger than the Page Size the page image will be enlarged The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver Fit to Page Printing Page 234 of 437 pages Pat Opto Samp Backoround _Oeaas 0K cance booty to 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size Page top Scaled Printing Page 235 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Scaled Printing Scaled Printing The 10th Amiversary Festival
205. lect and print the documents that you want printed 1 From Select Target select Selected Documents The titles of all documents are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list 2 Select the documents to be printed From the Documents to Be Printed list select the title check boxes of the documents to be printed EA Note When you select the Automatically select documents in lower hierarchies check box the check boxes of all document titles found in the lower hierarchies are selected Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 3 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary 4 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 5 Execute print Page 92 of 437 pages Printing This Manual Page 93 of 437 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents with selected check boxes are printed Print My Manual You can select and print documents registered in My Manual For details about My Manual see Registering Documents to My Manual 1 From Select Target select My Manual The titles of the documents that have been registered to My Manual are displayed in the Documents to B
206. lide the Paper Guides against the left and bottom edges of the stack Loading Paper e Check 2 Check to see if the paper you are printing on is not too thick or curled Loading Paper e Check 3 Make sure of the following when you load envelopes When printing on envelopes refer to Loading Paper and prepare the envelopes before printing Once you have prepared the envelopes load them in portrait orientation If the envelopes are placed in landscape orientation they will not feed properly e Check 4 Confirm the paper source setting If the paper source setting is not changed since you purchased this printer the paper source for plain paper is the Cassette e Setting with the printer driver Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose e For information on the paper source for plain paper when the Paper Source on the printer driver is set to Automatically Select Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper e Check 5 Remove the foreign object in the Cassette e Check 6 Make sure that there are not any foreign objects in the Rear Tray Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 387 of 437 pages If the paper tears in the Rear Tray see Paper Jams to remove it If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray be sure to turn off the printer unplug it from the power supply then remove the foreign object Check 7 Make sure that the Inner Cover is closed completely Paper does not feed properly if the Inn
207. lity m Ink is used for various purposes How is ink used for various purposes other than printing Ink may be used for purposes other than printing Ink is not only used for printing but also for cleaning the Print Head to maintain the optimal printing quality The printer has the function to automatically clean the ink jet nozzles to prevent clogging In the cleaning procedure ink is pumped out from the nozzles Used ink for nozzle cleaning is limited to a small amount Does black and white printing use color ink Black and white printing may use ink other than black ink depending on the type of printing paper or the settings of the printer driver So color ink is consumed even when printing in black and white Why does the printer have two black ink tanks There are two kinds of black ink in the printer dye ink BK and pigment ink PGBk The dye ink is used mainly for printing photos illustration etc and the pigment ink is used for text based documents Each has different purposes so that even if one runs out another will not be used instead If either of them runs out the ink tank replacement is required These two inks are automatically used depending on the type of printing paper or the settings of the printer driver You cannot change the usage of these inks yourself The ink lamp informs you when ink is running low The inside of the ink tank consists of A the part where ink is preserved and B the sponge
208. lts Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are Misaligned See Aligning the Print Head When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Page 52 of 437 pages O A Page top Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 53 of 437 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern m Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper E8 Note f the remaining ink level is low the nozzle check pattern will not be printed correctly Replace the ink tank whose ink is low See Replacing an Ink Tank Printing the nozzle check pattern without a computer You can also print the nozzle check pattern from the printer itself using the RRESUME CANCEL button 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open If the Inner Cover is open close it 3 Hold down the RESUME CANCEL button until the Power lamp flashes green twice then release it immediately The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern Examine the nozzle check pattern
209. ly the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Select the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shooting Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results It is recommended that you normally select this setting 5 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for corrected images 6 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 154 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Red Eye Correction Function Using the Red Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash You can perform the Red Eye Correction function either automatically or manually EA Note a Photo Print allows you to automatically correct red eyes when printing To correct automatically select Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and select the Enable Red Eye Correction chec
210. m the File menu and save Note Save will not be displayed in the Select Images or Select Paper screen Page top Opening Saved Files Page 195 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Opening Saved Files Easy PhotoPrint EX amp Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 Click Library from Menu Selact the Kem you want to create from the menu Salac LOrecy to access saved tems The Open dialog box appears You can check files created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX by icon view only for Windows Vista or thumbnail view P important When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer 2 Select the file you want to open and click Open The Layout Print screen appears ES Note Easy PhotoPrint EX supports the following file format extension Easy PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file el6 3 Edit the file if necessary E Note You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX with the following methods besides from Library in Menu Double click or click the file From the File menu click Open then select the file you want to edit Opening Saved Files Page 196 of 437 pages You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu Page
211. mages already imported click the Imported Images tab and select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window and click OK P important You cannot select multiple images in the Replace Image dialog box E8 Note If you select multiple images in the Edit screen and use the replacement function all the images selected in the Edit screen will be replaced with the image selected in the Replace Image dialog box When images are replaced the following settings of the old image are inherited to the new image Position Size Frame Position and size of the date The cropping information and image orientation are not inherited In the Replace Image dialog box you can change the display size and order of the thumbnails See Help for details Page top Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Page 206 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos a A Easy PhotoPrint EX Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos You can adjust the position angle and size of images Select the image of which you want to change the position or size in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Set the Center Position Rotation and Size then click OK Note a You can also change the position and size of an image by
212. me Ink use information Number of sheets printed and Maintenance information In ths survey we wil not collect or send any information about your computer other than that above or any of your personal information For this reason from the information that is sent to us we are unable to identify spectic customers Wie ore tharafnra nshle tn reenand Pn raniecte tn dierince amu crlacted infromation If you agree that we collect and send the information above and that we cannot disclose any collected information cick Agree Otherwise cick Do not agree If you wish to uninstall this program cick Uninstall This wil uninstall the program and no further survey wil be made Uninstal e If you agree to participate in the survey program Click Agree then follow the on screen instructions The printer usage information will be sent via the Internet If you have followed the on screen instructions the information will be sent automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again EA Note When the information is being sent a caution screen such as an Internet security screen may be displayed In this case confirm that the program name is IJPLMUI exe then allow it f you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box the information will not be sent automatically from the second time onward and a confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next su
213. ment Page top Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Page 385 of 437 pages Nelieirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing e Check 1 Is the Power lamp off Check if the Power lamp is lit green The Print Head Holder will not move unless the power is on If the Power lamp is off close the Top Cover and turn the printer on While the Power lamp is flashing green the printer is initializing Wait until the Power lamp stops flashing and remains lit green and then open the Top Cover again e Check 2 Is the Alarm lamp flashing Close the Top Cover confirm the number of times the Alarm lamp is flashing take the appropriate action to resolve the error and then reopen it For details on how to resolve the error see Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange e Check 3 Has the Top Cover been left open for 10 minutes or longer If the Top Cover is left open for more than 10 minutes the Print Head Holder moves to the right to prevent the Print Head from drying out Close and reopen the Top Cover to return the Print Head Holder to the center e Check 4 Has the printer been printing continuously for a long period Close the Top Cover wait a while then reopen it If the printer has been printing continuously for a long time the Print Head Holder may not move to the center since th
214. move the slider to the right To print the background at the original bitmap intensity move the slider to the rightmost position 6 Save the background Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box and then click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 7 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Background list Changing and Registering Some Background Settings 1 Select the background for which the settings are to be changed Check the Background check box in the Stamp Background dialog box and then select the title of the background you want to change from the Background list 2 Click Select Background The Background Settings dialog box opens 3 Specify the items on the Background tab while viewing the preview window 4 Save the background Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab When you want to save the background with a different title enter a new title in the Title box and click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 256 of 437 pages 5 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Background list Deleting an Unnecessary Background 1 Click Select Background in the Stamp Background dialog box The Background Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the background to
215. mp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately Cannot Install the Printer Driver Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Printing Speed Is Slow Hi Speed USB Connection Does Not Work This device can perform faster Message Is Displayed Print Results Not Satisfactory Cannot Print to End of Job Part of the Page Is Not Printed No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Lines Are Misaligned Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Back of the Paper Is Smudged Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Printing Does Not Start Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver Paper Jams Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing In Other Cases Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off an
216. n A Poway A ungego i Rotate 130 degoes B Prea Peper Sze Loner a57 Page Lagat Scaled Sf Hag cm Le w Sang E gt Roy Ouples Parting Automatic Prirt Area Setup Long aide stapling Leh d Specty Maryr 033 gy E Part iom Lant Page Colste pat Optoma _Same acggrund _Odaes_ 0K cares too ne The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be printed with the specified scale P important When the application software with which you created the original has the scaled printing function configure the settings on your application software You do not need to configure the same setting in the printer driver When Scaled is selected the Staple Side list box appears grayed out and is unavailable when Duplex Printing is not selected Note Page 236 of 437 pages Scaled Printing Page 237 of 437 pages Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document Page top Page Layout Printing Page 238 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Page Layout Printing Page Layout Printing The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper
217. n SB Poze Sete gf Eocts ff Martenance S v Plein Paper Nomaisie Bordeless FttoPage Scsed Page Layout Gatton 3 50 11 00 PaperSie Wah 850 inches 2 17 16 54 Hadt 1100 5 inches 0582339 Cox cm tive Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page 263 of 437 pages 4 Set the custom paper size Specify Units and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used Then click OK 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified paper size Page top Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Page 264 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method gt Printing a Color Document in Monochrome s gt Specifying Color Correction s gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles s gt Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast s gt Simulating an Illustration gt Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors gt Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Pr
218. n Paper Paper Source Asonaca Select X The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust intensity Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies darkens the colors Moving the slider to the left dilutes brightens the colors You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 After adjusting each color click OK Adjusting Intensity Page 283 of 437 pages Color Adyuatmers Matching 0 a 8 E Low High 0 a Q E Low High 0 E Q pa Low Hoh O ABCDEF 1234567 Bowes homai Sample Type 7 f n 0 Q o m aje a go 8 View Color Patter z P important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity Related Topics gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Contrast Page 284 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Contrast Adjusting Contrast You can adjust the image contrast during printing To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct
219. n color spaces Adobe RGB has a wider color space than sRGB ICC profiles convert device dependent colors into a common color space By using an ICC profile and carrying out color management you can draw out the color space of the image data within the color reproduction area that the printer can express Selecting a Printing Method Suited to the Image Data The recommended printing method depends on the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data or the application software to be used There are two typical printing methods Check the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data and the application software to be used and then select the printing method suited to your purpose Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Describes the procedure for printing sRGB data by using the color correction function of the printer driver e To print using Canon Digital Photo Color The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer reproducing colors of the original image data and producing three dimensional effects and high sharp contrasts e To print by directly applying editing and touch up results of an application software When printing the data the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark and light areas while leaving the darkest and lightest areas intact When printing the data the printer applies fine adjustment results such as brightness adjustments made with an application software Printing wi
220. n the Save settings tab When you want to save the stamp with a different title type a new title in the Title box and click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Stamp list Deleting an Unnecessary Stamp Click Define Stamp in the Stamp Background dialog box The Stamp Settings dialog box opens Select the stamp to be deleted Select the title of the stamp you want to delete from the Stamps list on the Save settings tab Then click Delete Click OK when the confirmation message appears Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again O O Page top Page 253 of 437 pages Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 254 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing gt Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background This feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used You can select a bitmap file bmp and register it as a new background You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing background An unnecessary background can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follo
221. n will appear in the Dock at the time of the next survey e If you do not agree to participate in the survey program Click Do not agree The confirmation screen will be closed and the survey at that time is skipped The confirmation screen will be displayed again three months later e To stop sending the information Click Turn off The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is stopped and the information will not be sent To resume the survey see Changing the setting e To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program 1 Stop the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program s gt Changing the setting 2 Select Applications from the Go menu and double click the Canon Utilities folder then the Inkjet Extended Survey Program folder 3 Place the Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program app file into the Trash 4 Restart the computer Empty the Trash and restart your computer e Changing the setting To display the confirmation screen every time the printer usage information is sent or to resume surveying follow the procedure below 1 Select Applications from the Go menu and double click the Canon Utilities folder then the Inkjet Extended Survey Program folder 2 Double click the Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program icon AQL Extended Survey Program Preferences General Do not display the confirmation screen when information is sent
222. ncediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Printing Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears Print mapas in the selected byot Cick the Pring button to print with the current settings Printing starts Canon xox J Copies Paper Sua 4x6 ILS Papar Source Meca Typa Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il Print Quaityz 0 trig 9 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size a Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos You can specify t
223. nd Printing Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Printing an Envelope Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Operations Canon lJ Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon IJ Status Monitor Canon lJ Preview Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device About PictBridge Print Settings Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device Troubleshooting Troubleshooting iP4700 series Advanced Guide Page 86 of 437 pages If an Error Occurs The Printer Cannot Be Powered On Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Power La
224. nd enhancements Save All Corrected Images Saves all the images that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Manual Tab Select to correct manually Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast or to sharpen the entire image Use Correct Enhance to correct enhance specific areas Adjust Correct Enhance Images Window Page 172 of 437 pages CA Users User Name gitljpg Brightness Adjusts the overall image brightness Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image Sharpness Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image Adjust the sharpness when the photo is out of focus or text is blurred Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image Blur Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image Move the slider to the right to soften the image Show through Removal Removes show through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color Adjust the show through level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document from appearing on the image Move the slider to the right to increase the show through removal effect Defaults Resets each adjustment brig
225. nding on the selection of the page size or media type See Media Types You Can Use E8 Note When printing select the correct page size and media type If you select the wrong page size or media type the printer may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality For details on how to load paper in each paper source see Loading Paper in the Cassette or Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Loading Plain Paper in the Cassette When you use A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper load it in the Cassette The printer feeds paper from the Cassette automatically by selecting plain paper A4 B5 A5 or Letter size in the print settings with the printer driver when printing For details on how to change the paper source setting refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Loading Photo Paper in the Rear Tray When you use photo paper load it in the Rear Tray The printer feeds paper from the Rear Tray automatically by selecting the media types other than plain paper such as photo paper in the print settings with the printer driver when printing When you use plain paper other than A4 B5 A5 or Letter size also load it in the Rear Tray Loading Paper Page 29 of 437 pages O 0 A Page top Loading Paper in the Cassette Page 30 of 437 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper in the Cassette m Loading Paper in the Cassette You can loa
226. ng Make sure that all of the protective film is peeled off and the air hole is exposed as illustrated in A If the orange tape is left as in B pull the orange tape and remove it A B Check 4 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly Check to see if a particular color s ink tank is not empty If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient perform the Print Head Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the printer and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e f the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center Check 5 When using paper with one printable surface make sure that the paper is loaded with the printable side facing up Printing on the wrong side of su
227. ng items explained below may not be available on some devices When you cannot change print settings on a device the printer prints images as follows Paper size 4 x 6 101 6 x 152 4 mm Paper type Photo Layout 1 up Borderless Date File No Print Not printed Image Optimize The Photo optimizer pro function will be used for optimized printing The following settings can be used when printing from a PictBridge compliant device Paper size 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 5 x 7 1 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm A4 8 5 x 11 Letter 4 x 7 1 10 1 x 18 cm 2 1 10x15 may appear on some PictBridge compliant device 2 Hi Vision may appear on a non Canon brand PictBridge compliant device Paper type _ e Default Photo Paper Plus Glossy I PP 201 e Photo Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP 201 Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use GP 501 Photo Paper Glossy GP 502 Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss SG 201 Photo Stickers When printing on sticker paper select 10 x 15 cm 4 x 6 in Paper size Do not set Layout to Borderless e Fast Photo Photo Paper Pro II PR 201 e Plain A4 Letter When Paper type is set to Plain borderless printing will be disabled even when Layout is set to Borderless Layout Default Borderless Index Bordered Borderless N up 2 4 9 16 1 20 up 2 35 up 3 EF veil compatible with A4 or Letter sized paper and Canon brand sticker above A4 Letter 4 up Photo Stickers 2 up 4 up 9 up 16 up 2 With a Canon brand
228. ng with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Printing Printing 1 Click Layout Print The Layout Print screen appears Select the layat you want lo pent Check the Preview and cick the Print button Pra a Exif Print ARn a ela m ES i P important The thumbnails reduced images displayed in the screen may appear as follows A black line appears along an edge of the image An edge of the image appears cropped However such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed and print results will not be affected 2 Select a layout you want to use Click a borderless layout to print borderless photos Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the printer paper size and media type 3 Click Print P important When you print on large size paper such as A3 A3 some computers cannot print properly if you print more than one page or copy at a time It is recommended that you print page by page when you print on such paper While printing on paper larger than A4 or printing high resolution images data may be printed only to the middle if many images are printed at one time In such cases select the Spool print job page by page checkbox in the Preferences dialog box and then print again Printing Page 113 of 437 pages S5 To display the Preferences dialog box click ott Settings or select Preferences from the File menu T
229. nk the ink may spill out and stain your hands and the surrounding area Be careful to handle the ink tank Do not squeeze the side of ink tanks as this may cause the ink to leak out Be careful not to stain your hands and the surrounding area with ink on the removed protective cap Do not reattach the protective cap once you have removed it Discard it according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables Do not touch the open ink port once the protective cap is removed as this may prevent the ink Page 45 of 437 pages Replacing an Ink Tank from being ejected properly 5 Install the new ink tank 1 Insert the front end of ink tank into the Print Head at a slant Make sure that the position of the ink tank matches the label 2 Press the mark Push on the ink tank until the ink tank snaps firmly into place Make sure that the ink lamp lights up red gt Important You cannot print if the ink tank is installed in the wrong position Be sure to install the ink tank in the correct position according to the label on the Print Head Holder You cannot print unless all the ink tanks are installed Be sure to install all the ink tanks 6 Close the Top Cover EA Note if the Alarm lamp still flashes orange after the Top Cover is closed refer to Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide When you start printing after replacing
230. notes on handling paper For information on the page sizes available for each Canon genuine paper visit our website You may not be able to purchase some Canon genuine papers depending on the country or region of purchase Paper is not sold in the US by Model Number Purchase paper by name 2 Proper feeding of paper may not be possible at the maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions either very high or low temperature or humidity In such cases reduce the number of paper you load at a time to less than half 100 recycled paper can be used 3 A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper can be loaded only when Rear Tray is selected in Paper Source Setting for Plain Paper For details on the settings refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 4 Feeding this paper from the Cassette can damage the printer Always load in the Rear Tray 5 We recommend that you remove the previously printed sheet from the Paper Output Tray before continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration 6 When loading paper in stacks the print side may become marked as it is fed or paper may not feed properly In this case load one sheet at a time 7 You can easily specify print settings for sticker paper with Easy PhotoPrint EX provided on the Setup CD ROM Install it on your computer Page Sizes You can use the following page sizes Note You can load plain paper of the following page sizes in the Cassette A4
231. nter Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Contact the service center Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed ig displayed in the alphanumeric character and depends on the error occurred e 5100 or 5110 Is Displayed Confirm the movement of the Print Head Holder blocked Cancel printing from your computer and turn off the printer Then clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the Print Head Holder from moving and turn on the printer again P important Be careful not to touch the components inside the printer The printer may not print out properly if you touch it If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 396 of 437 pages e 6000 Is Displayed If any object is placed in front of the printer remove it Open the Paper Output Tray gently then turn the power off and back on e Four Digit Alphanumeric and Printer error has occurred Is Displayed Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Plug t
232. nting with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Swapping Positions of Photos ji tS S DY Easy PhotoPrint EX gie lt P Swapping Positions of Photos You can swap the positions of images Ce Click Swap Image Positions in the Edit screen Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create Sead costars of two mages N Te um Select target aod source mugen Ga swap Posters Re Ml Vy 7 Tarot Edit Tools BAe aHan aaee we Select the target and source images you want to swap then click Swap When you finish swapping all images you want to swap click Back to Edit Page top Replacing Photos Page 205 of 437 pages Adna tiffs Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Replacing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Replacing Photos You can replace an image with another image Select the image you want to replace in the Edit screen then click Replace Selected Image K 50000_sJ00 Bec Or Ya MONON sina MEAN siaa Select the folder containing the image you want to replace with from the folder tree area on the left of the Replace Image dialog box Select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window on the right of the screen and click OK If you want to select from the i
233. o Computer Properly s gt Print Results Not Satisfactory Printing Does Not Start Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected s gt Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected s gt Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver Paper Jams s gt Message Appears on the Computer Screen Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing For Windows Users Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device sb FAQs If You Cannot Resolve the Problem s Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page top Page 355 of 437 pages If an Error Occurs Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt If an Error Occurs If an Error Occurs When an error occurs in printing such as the printer is out of paper or paper is jammed a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically Take the appropriate action described in the message The message may vary depending on the version of your operating system 1 Load paper into the cassette 2 Press the printer s RESUME Plain paper of A4 Letter B5 and A5 sizes wil be fed from the cassette because Automatically Select is selected for Paper Source in the printer diver e In Mac OS X v 10 5 x Printing Gemeiee PP ao Error Number 1003 The following paper has run out Medi
234. o leave one side of a sheet blank check the check box and select the page to be left blank Margin Enter the margin width The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width for one page Page Border To print a page border around each document page check the check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document is automatically printed first on one side of a sheet of paper and then on the opposite side When the printing is complete fold the paper at the center of the margin and make a booklet P important Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper Hagaki A or Hagaki is selected for Media Type When Booklet is selected Duplex Printing Staple Side Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of booklet printing Page top Duplex Printing Page 245 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Duplex Printing Duplex Printing The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab Performing Automatic Duplex Printing You can perform the duplex printing without having to tu
235. ocument page check this check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in the specified order Page top Poster Printing Page 240 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Poster Printing Poster Printing The poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data divide it into several pages and print these pages on separate sheets of paper When the pages are pasted together they form a large print like a poster k S C The procedure for performing poster printing is as follows Setting Poster Printing 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set poster printing Select Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver FR ack Senp E Man B Page Setup uf Bocce A Martenance El Page Sze Lotier 25x11 Orton A Poa A ngc Fotste 180 degrees A 5 Preter Poper Sze Letier 8 5731 Page Lagat Poster D 4 a U Bordetess FttoPage Scaled Page Layout Poster 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list Setting 2 by 2 page pos
236. ods gt Booklet Printing Booklet Printing The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet Data is printed on both sides of the paper This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly in page number order when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set booklet printing Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the window a me eectey SFT Bee atl h Canon iPS700 19 P a x TR ask Sep Man B Page Setup of Etocts Aj Martenance E Page Sze Letter 8 5731 amp Onertation la Porat A ungego Rete 180 degrees B Ptr PoS Letter 351 S 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list 4 Set the margin for stapling and the margin width Click Specify and specify the following settings in the Booklet Printing dialog box and then click OK Booklet Printing Page 244 of 437 pages Booklet Printing E27 ma Mogn for tiging Lek m en hzer blank page Magn 04 gt nhs 0012 Page Bordar Canen oetara to Margin for stapling Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed Insert blank page T
237. oes Not Feed Properly e Check 1 Is the CD R Tray placed properly Properly place the CD R Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are using the CD R Tray supplied with the printer G is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray e Check 2 Unrecognizable DVD CD may be placed Canon recommends that you use DVD CDs specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer e Check 3 Is the DVD CD on the CD R Tray already printed If you place a DVD CD on which has already been printed on the CD R Tray the CD R Tray may be ejected In this case change the settings of the printer driver and try printing again Windows e Clear the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box in Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab then click Send When printing is over select the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box and click Send tom Cannot Print on DVD CDs Page 318 of 437 pages e Clear the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box in Custom Settings on the Canon lJ Printer Utility dialog box then click Send When printing is over select the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box and click Send Note If you left cleared Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box and start printing another DVD CD printing may start without the DVD CD loaded Selecting the check box prevents the CD R Tray f
238. of DVD CDs gt Printing Area Printing Area Printable DVD CDs The printing area of both printable DVDs and CDs is the area excluding the 1 mm area from the internal and external diameters of the label 1 0 mm 1 0 mm E Recommended printing area Page top Troubleshooting Page 314 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Message Appears on the Computer Screen Cannot Print on DVD CDs Page top Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 315 of 437 pages Nelieirlecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Troubleshooting gt Message Appears on the Computer Screen Message Appears on the Computer Screen Kia Errors About DVD CD Printing Are Displayed METE Message 1001 Is Displayed mp MEST Error Number 1002 Is Displayed METTE Message 1850 Is Displayed RMS Errors About DVD CD Printing Are Displayed e Check 1 Is the CD R Tray placed properly Open the Inner Cover properly place the CD R Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are using the CD R Tray supplied with the printer G is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray e Check 2 Is the DVD CD placed on the CD R Tray Properly place the DVD CD on the CD R Tray attach the CD R Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are using the CD R Tra
239. of Photos gt Replacing Photos s gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos s gt Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers Creating an Album Page 115 of 437 pages How Can Move or Copy the Saved File What Is C1 or C4 Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 116 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selact the Kem you wanz to create from the menu Selack Lorry to access saved Roms Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 117 of 437 pages WelFisesel Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Easy PhotoPrint EX ES Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Album from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Specty abun structure paper Sze etc in General Settings then select a theme Cick the buttons at the bottom of the screen to specty tryout and background
240. og box will appear 2 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in Printer 3 Select Quality amp Media in the pop up menu 4 Select the media type of the loaded paper in Media Type Here we select Plain Paper E8 Note If you select A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper when Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source the printer feeds the paper from the Cassette If you select other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper the printer feeds the paper from the Rear Tray If you select the wrong page size or media type the printer may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality 5 Make sure that Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source EA Note For details on other settings for Paper Source refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 6 Select the print quality in Print Quality Here we select Standard EA Note For details on the print quality refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Prieter TOO serves K 2 Poun Sardes El Qealty amp Media 3 3 Pager Source Aunowuscally Select TA case Crapicale Previrg T Fe henra Grei C E9 Note For details on the printer driver functions click Question on the Quality amp Media Color Options Special Effects Borderless Printing or Duplex Printing amp Margin screen To display the preview to confirm the print result click Preview Some software ap
241. on Extend and open to support the printouts Open it when printing 9 Inner Cover Close it when printing on paper 10 Power button Press to turn the power on or off gt Important Disconnecting the power plug When disconnecting the power plug after turning off the power be sure to confirm that the Power lamp is not lit If the power plug is disconnected from the wall outlet while the Power lamp is lit or flashing the printer may become unable to print properly since the Print Head is not protected E8 Note Auto power on off feature You can set the printer to turn on or off automatically Auto Power On Automatically turns on the printer when print data is sent from the computer Auto Power Off Automatically turns off the printer when no print data is sent fora certain interval Specify this setting on the Maintenance sheet of the printer driver setup window Windows or in the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh For details on the settings refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 11 Power lamp Lights green after flashing when the power is turned on 12 RESUME CANCEL button Press to cancel a print job in progress You can press this button to release from printer error status and resume printing after the printer problem is resolved 13 Alarm lamp Flashes orange when an error occurs such as paper out or ink out Page 5 of 437 pages Main Components Page 6 of 437 pages E Note P
242. onfirmation message appears click OK The Maintenance tab is displayed again The Auto Power On Off function is enabled hereafter When you want to disable this function select Disable from the list according to the same procedure Managing the Printer Power Page 351 of 437 pages EE Note When the printer is turned off the status monitor message varies depending on the Auto Power On setting When Auto Power On is enabled Printer is standing by is displayed When Auto Power On is disabled Printer is offline is displayed Page top Reducing the Printer Noise Page 352 of 437 pages Advanced Giitels Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Reducing the Printer Noise Reducing the Printer Noise This function allows you to reduce the operating noise of the printer Select when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer at night etc Using this function may lower the print speed The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows z Quiet Mode 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Quiet Mode on the Maintenance tab The Quiet Mode dialog box opens Set the quiet mode If necessary specify one of the following items Do not use quiet mode The operating noise of the printer is at normal volume Always use quiet mode Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer Use quiet mode within s
243. only on the first page check this check box Select Background button To use another background or change the layout or density of a background click this refer to Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified background P important When Borderless is selected the Stamp Background button appears grayed out and is unavailable Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page Stamp Background Printing function of booklet printing Related Topics gt Registering a Stamp gt Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 250 of 437 pages Page top Registering a Stamp Page 251 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing gt Registering a Stamp Registering a Stamp This feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used You can create and register a new stamp You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing stamp Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows Registering a New Stamp 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab
244. ook at the first printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column A that has the least noticeable vertical streaks e amp Ee Sack sy sas a 2 aoe 8 4 oe oe ee ff E a 3 G iuro eitt S 1 ERSE tet i b t E8 Note f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks MAH MAAUA A B A Less noticeable vertical white streaks B More noticeable vertical white streaks 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column G then click Send For column F and G pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal streaks EA Note f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable Page 339 of 437 pages Manual Print Head Alignment horizontal white streaks C Less noticeable horizontal white streaks D More noticeable horizontal white streaks 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The second pattern is printed P important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress 6 Look at the second printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column H that has the least noticeable vertical streaks a a z e OUR as I os 1 os os 1M gt 1 eo ss E 21
245. operties to Improve Coloration s gt Reducing Photo Noise Page top Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Page 265 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method You can individually set the combined representation method for the print quality level and the halftoning method The procedure for setting the print quality level and the halftoning method is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the print quality Select Custom for Print Quality on the Main tab and click Set TR Gack Sense D Man 3 Page Setup gf Efect A _Martenance L Meda Tipe Plan Paper The Custom dialog box opens Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Page 266 of 437 pages Qusity 3 Setting the print quality and halftone expression method Move the Quality slider to select the quality level Select the expression method in Halftoning and click OK ES Note Halftones refer to color shades between the darkest color and the brightest color The printer replaces the color shades with a collection of small dots to express
246. or Canon Matte Photo Paper MP 101 in the Rear Tray Load it with the printing side whiter side facing you in the Rear Tray gt Important You cannot use the Cassette to align the Print Head automatically Be sure to load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important if the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the Canon IJ Printer Utility See Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh 5 Adjust the print head position 1 Select Test Print in the pop up menu 2 Click Print Head Alignment Marcle Check Pries pameran that lees yore chech whether peist head nacca are Clogged srt Head Ayron Executes pring head aligrenert to correct the mialaprevert of colors and bine on 3 Confirm the displayed message and click Align Print Head Darting automate prvi head elbgrenest wi AA A A OP and wra fe power ond baad a ihoet of A4 or lerser yoe Mame Preto Pause MP LOLI aano Che sear Say Aad Click bg Prt Paad ee ret en nmn poten Lr Meng cack Frnt Agaro make Fist Algona xe Geren The print head alignment pattern will be printed and the printer will adjust the print head position automatically Aligning the Print Head Page 69 of 437 pages Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the print head alignment pattern This takes about 5 minutes to complete
247. or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality 7 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the information is printed on the envelope P important When you execute envelope printing guide messages are displayed To hide the guide messages check the Do not show this message again check box To show the guide again click the View Printer Status button on the Maintenance tab and start the Canon lJ Status Monitor Then click Envelope Printing from Display Guide Message of the Option menu and change the setting to on Page top Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Page 259 of 437 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose In this printer there are two paper sources a rear tray and a cassette You can facilitate printing by selecting a paper source setting that matches your print conditions or purpose The procedure for setting paper source is as follows You can also set the paper source on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the paper source From the Paper Source list on the Main tab select the paper source that matches your purpose akso D Man Pace Setup gf Elects Aj Martenance e ayssa Bon Pian Paper Gato Leter
248. oreign object e Check 3 Is the Rear Cover closed completely e Check 4 Is the paper curled Check 3 Load the paper after correcting its curl Page top Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 395 of 437 pages Nelieirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Message Appears on the Computer Screen Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed s gt Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed sb Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed s gt Error Regarding Automatic Print Head Alignment Is Displayed b Mi writing Error Output Error Communication Error sp MEE Error Number 300 Is Displayed mp MEST Error Number 1700 Is Displayed sp METT Ink Info Number 1600 Is Displayed mp MEST ink Info Number 1683 Is Displayed sp BETE Ink Info Number 1688 Is Displayed mp MEST Error Number 1851 Is Displayed gt Error Number 1856 Is Displayed mp MEST Error Number 2001 Is Displayed sp METT Error Number 2002 Is Displayed Error Number 2500 Is Displayed UOTA Other Error Messages gt Miers the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed sp MEET The Inkjet Pri
249. ork Mires this device can perform faster Message Is Displayed If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi Speed USB the printer will operate at a lower speed provided under USB 1 1 In this case the printer operates properly but printing speed may slow down due to communication speed e Check Check the following to make sure that your system environment supports Hi Speed USB connection e Does the USB port on your computer support Hi Speed USB connection e Do the USB cable and the USB hub if you are using one support Hi Speed USB connection Be sure to use a certified Hi Speed USB cable We recommend that the cable is no longer than around 10 feet 3 meters Does the operating system of your computer support Hi Speed USB connection Obtain and install the latest update for your computer Does the Hi Speed USB driver operate properly Obtain the latest version of the Hi Speed USB driver compatible with your hardware and reinstall it on your computer P important For details on Hi Speed USB of your system environment contact the manufacturer of your computer USB cable or USB hub Page top Print Results Not Satisfactory Page 365 of 437 pages Nelieirlesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory Print Results Not Satisfactory If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks misaligned lines or uneven colors confirm the paper and print quality settings f
250. orrection is as follows You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set Cancon DR casei Set Man Page Setup of Etects Af Martenance Meds Tipe Plan Paper lt Paper Source Actcmatically Select X The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Select color correction Click Matching tab select Color Correction setting that matches your purpose from the following and click OK Specifying Color Correction Page 270 of 437 pages Driver Matching By using Canon Digital Photo Color you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer Driver Matching is the default setting for color correction ICM You can print by using the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data effectively None The printer driver does not perform color correction Select this value when you are specifying an individually created printing ICC profile or a printing ICC profile for special Canon paper in an application software to print data 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified color correction method P important When IC
251. ot selected Solution Menu does not start when Windows starts ES Note Solution Menu will start automatically when you install it using the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the printer Changing the Window Size Click m window size large or window size small on the title bar to change the window size About Solution Menu Page 437 of 437 pages large or small Solution Menu opens with the last used window size next time it is started e When screen size is small Canon Solution Menu ome Starting an Application 1 Point to a button on the window to display the description of each application 2 By clicking each button the introduced application starts Follow the same steps to view the manuals or online product information P important Internet connection is required to access the online information Internet connection fees apply Exiting Solution Menu Click E3 Close on the title bar Restriction on Use of Solution Menu This software is subject to the following restriction Keep this point in mind when using it e All icons of the installed applications that support Solution Menu are displayed in the window After the installation you cannot rearrange the icons or delete only the icons Page top
252. oting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Tip After loading paper be sure to specify the paper settings After loading paper be sure to select the loaded paper in Media Type of the printer driver If the type of paper is not selected you may not be able to get the satisfactory print result See Printing and Media Types You Can Use There are various types of paper paper with special coating on the surface for printing photos with optimal quality and paper suitable for documents Media Type of the printer driver has different settings for each type of paper in advance such as using ink ejecting ink or distance from nozzles so that you can print on each paper with the optimal image quality You can print with different settings in Media Type suitable for each type of loaded paper m Use the RESUME CANCEL button to cancel printing Tip Never press the Power button If you press the Power button while printing is in progress the print data sent from the computer queues in the printer and you may not be able to continue to print Press the RESUME CANCEL button to cancel printing Note If you cannot cancel printing by pressing the RESUME CANCEL button while printing from a computer open the printer driver setup window to delete the unnecessary print jobs from the printer status monitor Windows E Does the printer need to be handled with care when using or transporting Tip Do not use or transport the printer
253. oto was taken on the photo click Date Settings in the Layout Print screen then select the Print date checkbox in the Date Settings dialog box Text Orientation A Landscape T Portrait Position Font Size Color F Apply to all images Note The date is displayed in the short date format mm dd yyyy etc specified in your operating system See Help for details on setting dates Page top Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Page 188 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing Multiple Photos on One Page You can print multiple photos on one page by selecting a multiple photo layout in the Layout Print screen Select the layout you wari lo part Check the Preview and chek the Print button Pity Printing starts Exif Print E Buah Note See the following section for details on how to select photos gt Selecting a Photo The available number of photos and layout may vary depending on the media type Photos are arranged in the following order Example Borderless x4 1 3 2 4 You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box
254. ow The image appears in Preview Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Adjust p Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level The following adjustments are available Brightness Contrast Adjusting Images Page 168 of 437 pages Sharpness Blur Show through Removal Showtheqagh Rersoval EA Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments 5 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save adjusted images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif file format is available for adjusted images 6 Click Exit P important The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images Page top Correct Enhance Images Window Page 169 of 437 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Correct Enhance Images Window Easy PhotoPrint EX Correct Enhance Images Window You can correct enhance images in this window To display the Correct Enhance Images window click P Correct Enhance Images in the Select Images or Edit screen or in the Layout Print screen of Photo Print ea Auto Photo Fix or A RedEye Conecton 22 Face Shapenet
255. ower and Alarm lamps You can check the status of the printer by the Power and Alarm lamps Power lamp is off The power is off Power lamp lights green The printer is ready to print Power lamp flashes green The printer is getting ready to print or printing is in progress Alarm lamp flashes orange An error has occurred and the printer is not ready to print For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Power lamp flashes green and Alarm lamp flashes orange alternately An error that requires contacting the service center may have occurred For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide m Rear View 14 USB Port Plug in the USB cable to connect the printer with a computer gt Important Do not touch the metal casing Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while printing 15 Rear Cover Detach to remove jammed paper Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide 16 Power Cord Connector Plug in the supplied power cord E Inside View 17 17 Ink lamps Light or flash red to indicate the ink tank status See Checking the Ink Status Main Components Page 7 of 437 pages 18 Print Head Lock Lever Locks the Print Head into place gt Important Do not raise this lever after installing the Print Head 19 Print Head Holder Install the Print Head Note For details on installin
256. page size or media type the printer may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality 4 Click Layout Print reer a a re SSS Pete ee 4 3 5 Select a layout and start printing 1 Select the layout of the photo Here we select Borderless full The preview will appear in the selected layout for confirmation of the required print result Ee Note Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX You can change the direction of photo or crop photos trimming to print For details on the operation refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Click Print D tet Ome tote E8 Note To cancel a print job in progress press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor After canceling the print job blank sheets of paper may be ejected To display the printer status monitor click Canon XXX where XXX is your printer s name on the taskbar acintosh Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress To cancel a print job in progress select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete To temporarily stop a job in progress click Hold To temporarily stop all the jobs in the list click Pause Printer or Stop Jobs After canceling the print job blank sheets of paper may be ejected O amp Page top Page 12 of 437 pages Using Various
257. pe the printer may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality 5 Make sure that Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source ES Note For details on other settings for Paper Source refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 6 Select the print quality in Print Quality Here we select Standard Ee Note For details on the print quality refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Primer Canon 194700 series lel XXXXK BOOK Presets Standard H Copes 3 icolured Pager BAL a Ofrarn 1 w l maune MG 23 08 by TOW a Criestston Ma fe Quahty 6 Verte KZ Paper Soarte Autorvatically Select I Canser 5 Prine Qalin O High nsara Ute Cuore Comyacale Proeting D EI Cae G Ee Note For details on the printer driver functions click Question on the Quality amp Media Color Options Borderless Printing or Duplex Printing amp Margin screen The preview appears on the left of the dialog box to confirm the print result Some software applications may not have a preview function Page 18 of 437 pages Printing Documents Macintosh 7 Start printing Click Print to start printing Note Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress To cancel a print job in progress select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete To temporarily stop a job in progress clic
258. pecified time The operating noise of the printer can be reduced during a specified period of time Set the Start time and End time when you wish the quiet mode to be activated P important The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different Transmit the settings Make sure that the printer is on and click Send Click OK when the confirmation message appears The settings are enabled hereafter Ea Note a Depending on the paper source and the print quality settings effects of the quiet mode may be less Page top Changing the Printer Operation Mode Page 353 of 437 pages Nelieiejecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Printer Operation Mode Changing the Printer Operation Mode If necessary switch between various modes of printer operation The procedure for configuring settings is as follows 1 2 Custom Settings Open the printer driver setup window Make sure that the printer is on and then click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab The Custom Settings dialog box opens ES Note If the printer is off or bi directional communication is disabled a message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status If this happens click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer If necessary complete the following settings Prevent paper abrasion
259. pen the Page Setup dialog box to specify page paper settings before printing 1 Select Page Setup on the File menu in your application program The Page Setup dialog box opens Opening the Print Dialog Box Open the Print dialog box to specify print settings before printing 1 Select Print on the File menu in your application program The Print dialog box opens Page top Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh Page 426 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Opening the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh To open the Canon lJ Printer Utility follow the procedure below In Mac OS X v 10 5 x 1 Select System Preferences on the Apple menu 2 Click Print amp Fax 3 Select your printer s name in the Printers and click Open Print Queue The job list of your printer is displayed 4 Click Utility Status Name User When Completed The Printer List opens 5 Select your printer s name in the Product list and click Maintenance uss CE nts Type 4700 series Canon Printer The Canon lJ Printer Utility starts up Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility Macintosh Page 427 of 437 pages In Mac OS X v 10 4 x or Mac OS X v 10 3 9 1 Select Applications on the Go menu 2 Double click the Utilities folder and then double click the Printer Setup Utility icon The Printer List opens 3 Select your printer s name in the
260. perform printer maintenance or change the settings of the printer fi Seep E Man 23 Page Setup af Btects Ab Martensnce Coanng Betton Plte Gearing a Biminates unwanted smudges and ines in a Preverts paper smudges during panting he pert erk Deep Gearing Roler Cesning eS Unesogs nores that carnet be cieares gimp Executes pert roler cleaving for smoother paper feeding Power Oti by regda Cleaning Part Head Aignment ul Exncses prt head oigrerert 1o corect a Tums the perter off Nozze Qreck Ato Power ms Prrts a pattem to check whether the part Gy Allows you to set the auto power setings z Paper Source Setting for Pisin Paper Quiet Mode Sets paper source for plain paper when E Abows you to reduce the operating noise Paper Source is Automatically Select way fornight or slert stustions Custom Semings j Allows you to select opention optens Features s gt Cleaning the Print Heads s gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position sb Checking the Print Head Nozzles Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper Cleaning Inside the Printer Managing the Printer Power Related Features Reducing the Printer Noise s gt Changing the Printer Operation Mode Page top Canon IJ Status Monitor Page 301 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Print
261. played in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab 4 Set the stamp details If necessary specify the following settings and then click OK Place stamp over text To print the stamp on the front of the document check this check box Note The stamp is given priority because the stamp is printed over the document data in the sections where the stamp and the document data overlap When this check box is unchecked the stamp is printed behind the document data and may be hidden in the overlapping sections depending on the application used Stamp first page only To print the stamp only on the first page check this check box Define Stamp button To change the stamp text bitmap or position click this refer to Registering a Stamp 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified stamp Printing a Background Two bitmap files are pre registered as samples 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab The Stamp Background dialog box opens 3 Select the background Check the Background check box and select a desired background from the list The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab 4 Set the background details If necessary complete the following settings and then click OK Background first page only To print the background
262. plex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print Printing Page 135 of 437 pages EE Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Q Page top Printing Stickers Page 136 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Stickers You can print your favorite photos on compatible sticker sheets Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos m Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving gt Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Save
263. plications may not have a preview function Page 20 of 437 pages Printing Documents Macintosh Page 21 of 437 pages T Start printing Click Print to start printing Note Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress To cancel a print job in progress select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete To temporarily stop a job in progress click Hold To temporarily stop all the jobs in the list click Stop Jobs After canceling the print job blank sheets of paper may be ejected If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head A Page top Other Usages Page 22 of 437 pages Basic Guide P Contents gt Other Usages Other Usages This section introduces the function to print photos from your PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera connecting with a USB cable This section also introduces useful software applications you can use with the printer Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device Useful Software Applications Solution Menu My Printer Easy WebPrint EX amp Page top Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 23 of 437 pages Basic Guide a Contents gt Other Usages gt Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device You can connect the PictBridge compliant device to this p
264. pplication Software gt Other Settings gt Setting Holidays DNI te Easy PhotoPrint EX se Setting Holidays You can add holidays to your calendar a Click Set Holidays in the Page Setup screen of Calendar or click Setup Period Holiday in the Edit screen and click Set Holidays in the Calendar General Settings dialog box to display the Holiday Settings dialog box Period From 12 2009 to 2 2010 Date Holiday Name Set as Holiday To add a holiday click Add The Add Edit Holiday dialog box appears To edit a saved holiday select it and click Edit To delete a holiday select it and click Delete To delete all the saved holidays within your calendar period click Clear Setting Holidays Page 217 of 437 pages Holiday Name 7 Set as Holiday Period From 12 2009 to 2 2010 Month Year December 2009 X Day Date Day of week Sunday Enter the name in Holiday Name and specify the date Select the Set as Holiday checkbox to display that day as a holiday in your calendar E Note See Help for details on each dialog box Page top Setting Calendar Display Page 218 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Setting Calendar Display te Easy PhotoPrint EX Setting Calendar Display You can customize the calendar display fonts l
265. printing select Plain Paper and click OK Expanding the Range of the Document to Print Specifying a large amount of extension allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems However the portion of the document that extends off the paper range will not be printed Subjects around the perimeter of a photo may not be printed Try borderless printing once When you are not satisfied with the result of borderless printing reduce the amount of extension The extension amount becomes shorter as the Amount of Extension slider is moved to the left P important When the amount of extension is shortened an unexpected margin may be produced on the print depending on the size of the paper Note When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position image data will be printed in the full size When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab you can confirm before printing whether there will be no border Borderless Printing Page 232 of 437 pages Page top Fit to Page Printing Page 233 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Fit to Page Printing Fit to Page Printing Festival The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be used is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set fit to page printing Se
266. r 8 S11 215 2279 4eem Color rtensty Ago Manus set Grayscale Preng J Preview before prong CTS E Gana Gi tee 3 Complete the setup Click OK The Canon lJ Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing Related Topic s Canon IJ Preview Page top Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page 262 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size Such a paper size is called a custom size The procedure for specifying a custom size is as follows You can also set a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab 1 Set the custom size in the application software On your application s paper size feature specify the custom size P important When the application software that created the document has a function for specifying the height and width values use the application software to set the values When the application software does not have such a function or if the document does not print correctly use the printer driver to set the values 2 Open the printer driver setup window 3 Select the paper size Select Custom for Page Size on the Page Setup tab E asok Seno lt Ma
267. r to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started ES Note During the installation a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation 2 Start the wizard e In Windows XP select the start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes gt Add a printer Settings on Client PC Page 431 of 437 pages e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Printers gt Add Printer When Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard screen appears click Next 3 Add a printer Select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer Windows XP or Network printer Windows 2000 then click Next On the Specify a Printer window Windows XP or Locate Your Printer window Windows 2000 click Next and then search for the print server system Click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared and then click Next Note If the icon for the printer is not displayed check that the printer is actually connected to the print server 4 Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers and Faxes window Windows XP or Printers window Windows 2000 The setup on the client systems is complete You can now share the printer in
268. r your printing purpose Loading Paper e When performing Borderless Printing make sure that the paper you are using is suitable for Borderless Printing If the paper you are using is not suitable for Borderless Printing the print quality may be reduced at the top and bottom edges of the paper s Printing Area e Check 3 Load the paper after correcting its curl e For Plain Paper Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side Leaving the paper loaded on the Rear Tray for a long time may cause the paper to curl In this case load the paper with the other side facing up It may resolve the problem We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and keeping it on a level surface For Other Paper If the curl on the four corners of the paper is more than 0 1 inch 3 mm A in height the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly In such cases follow the procedure described below to correct the paper curl A 1 Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 373 of 437 pages 4 a 7 2 Check that the paper is now flat We recommend printing curl corrected paper one sheet at a time ES Note Depending on the media type the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it is not curled inward In such cases follow the procedure described below to curl the paper outward within 0 1 inch 3 mm B
269. ranted access permission for printer management cannot delete the print job of another user Ea Note When you perform this operation all print jobs are deleted If the print queue list contained a necessary print job start the printing process over from the beginning Page top Page 415 of 437 pages Updating the Printer Driver Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Driver Updating the Printer Driver Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver sb Before Installing the Printer Driver s Installing the Printer Driver Page top Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Page 416 of 437 pages Adna Gutels Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Driver gt Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver By updating the printer driver to the latest version of the printer driver unresolved problems may be solved You can check the version of the printer driver by clicking the About button on the Maintenance tab Access our web site through the Internet and download the latest printer driver for your model P important You can download the printer driver for free but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility Before installing the latest printer driver delete the previously installed version For information on how to delete the printer driver see Deleting the Unnecessar
270. rch results list When you execute a search by entering multiple keywords the search results are displayed as shown below Documents Containing Perfect Match Documents containing the entire search character string including spaces exactly as entered perfect match Documents Containing All Keywords Documents containing all keywords that were entered Documents Containing Any Keyword Documents containing at least one of the keywords that were entered 4 Display the document that you want to read From the search results list double click or select and press Enter the title of the document you want to read When the documents of that title are displayed the keywords found on those documents are highlighted Note If you modify the keyword entry and perform multiple searches a search history remains To delete the search history click located to the right of Keyword and select Clear History which is displayed Page top Registering Documents to My Manual Page 97 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Registering Documents to My Manual Registering Documents to My Manual Register frequently read documents as My Manual documents so that you can refer to those documents easily at any time Canon E series On screen Manual 4 Back p x a ly Ce e Tr My Marua series off Basic Guide Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Describes nmary of tailed
271. rect sunlight to dry the ink Do not touch the printing surface until the ink has dried e Do not attach the CD R Tray while the printer is in operation e Do not remove the CD R Tray while printing on DVD CDs Doing so may damage the printer the CD R Tray or the disc Do not get dirt or scratches on the reflectors of the CD R Tray The printer may not be able to recognize loading of the DVD CD or printing may become misaligned If the reflectors on the CD R Tray become dirty wipe the reflector clean with a soft dry cloth taking care not to scratch the plate The CD R Tray may become dirty if software other than CD LabelPrint or Easy PhotoPrint EX is used e Always use the supplied 8 cm CD R Adapter when printing on 8 cm DVD CDs e Always close the Inner Cover after printing on DVD CDs To keep the print quality at an optimal level it is recommended to stop printing discs once every ten discs when printing more than ten discs continuously To stop the printing operation detach the CD R Tray from the printer then close the Inner Cover After approximately three minutes have elapsed open the Inner Cover attach the CD R Tray to the printer then resume printing Page top Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Attaching the CD R Tray P important Do not a
272. reen appears Ede aber as needed Insert teat add mages of change layout Edit Tools Insde Pages ea ea wasa A ES lt 7 a General Tools 4 m9 X 39 ma DER Back Cover amp a 2 Edit your album if necessary s gt Changing Layout gt Changing Background gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos gt Attaching Comments to Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited album It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again The page numbers on the front and back covers of the album are displayed as follows C1 Front cover C2 Inside the front cover C3 Inside the back cover Editing C4 Back cover gt Saving E Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Page 122 of 437 pages Printing Page 123 of 437 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Printing Printi Easy PhotoPrint EX amp ng 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears 2 Set Check abum print sattngs Cick the Pring button to pring
273. registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted Page top Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper Page 349 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper When you select Automatically Select from Paper Source you can use the printer driver to select the paper source for plain paper The procedure for setting the paper source is as follows Paper Source Setting for Plain Paper 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Paper Source Setting for Plain Paper on the Maintenance tab The Paper Source Setting for Plain Paper dialog box opens 3 Transmit the settings Select the paper source for plain paper and then click the Send button The selected settings are enabled hereafter P important The descriptions in the printer manual assume that the plain paper is supplied from the cassette When you change the paper source setting replace all instances of cassette with the new paper source Page top Managing the Printer Power Page 350 of 437 pages NVelieielesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Managing the Printer Power Managing the Printer Power This function allows you to manage the printer power from the printer driver The procedure for managin
274. rinter with a USB cable that is recommended by the device s manufacturer and print saved images directly For details on how to print saved images connecting the PictBridge compliant device refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide For details on the print settings on the PictBridge compliant device refer to the instruction manual supplied with the device my pen Connectable devices Any PictBridge compliant device can be connected to this printer regardless of the manufacturer or model as long as it is compliant with the PictBridge Standard E8 Note PictBridge is the Standard to print your photos directly without using a computer connecting a device such as a digital still camera digital camcorder or camera equipped mobile phone i C PictBridge A device with this mark is PictBridge compliant Printable image data format This printer accepts images taken with a camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File system and PNG files Exif 2 2 2 21 compliant O A Page top Useful Software Applications Page 24 of 437 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Other Usages gt Useful Software Applications Useful Software Applications The printer can be used with useful software applications such as Solution Menu My Printer and Easy WebPrint EX m Solution Menu With Solution Menu you can start the software applications supplied with the printer or display the operating instructions tira
275. rinting When this check box is checked the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box is displayed before printing starts This dialog box allows you to check how many pages will be printed On the Document Selection tab select the method for printing the document The following four methods of printing are available e Print Current Document e Print Selected Documents e Print My Manual Printing This Manual e Print All Documents Note You can select the type to be printed and then easily specify print settings on the Print Setup tab Print Current Document You can print the currently displayed document 1 From Select Target select Current Document The title of the currently displayed document is displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list Note By selecting Print linked documents you can also print documents that are linked to the current document The linked documents are added to the Documents to Be Printed list Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 2 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary 3 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 4 Execute print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes The documents that are currently displayed are printed Print Selected Documents You can se
276. rmation In this survey we will not collect or send any information about your computer other Man that above or any of your personal information For this reason trom the information that is sent to us we are unable to identity specific customers We are therefore unable to respond to requests 10 disclose any collected information The above information will be collected on this computer at intervals of about one month information will be collected automatically requiring no customer operation if you agree that we collect and send the information above and that we cannot disclose any collected information click Agree Otherwise click Do not agree if you wish to turn off this program click Turn off This will disable the program and no further survey will be made gt Turn off lt e If you agree to participate in the survey program Click Agree then follow the on screen instructions The printer usage information will be sent via the Internet If you have followed the on screen instructions the information will be sent Page 400 of 437 pages Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 401 of 437 pages automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again Note If you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box the information will not be sent automatically from the second time onward and the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program ico
277. rn over the paper 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set automatic duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab and confirm that Automatic is checked TR ak Senp E gt Main 3 Page Setup gf Etocta AJ Martenance El Pope Sre ees z ti Onertation A Pora A Langscape Rotate 180 degrees a P j Same as Page Sre v a es Pign Paper Lome 85x11 215 82794m Nomasie Bordeless FatoPage Sesed Page Layout 3 Select the layout Select Normal size or Fit to Page Scaled or Page Layout from the Page Layout list 4 Set the print area When you perform duplex printing the print area of the document becomes slightly narrower than usual and the document may not fit on one page Click Print Area Setup and select one of the following processing methods Duplex Printing o N When automatic duplex parting is pefomed the pirtabie area of the pirte becomes narrower than usual and the printer may not be able to pirt the entre documert Select Use reduced panting to part within the Portable wea Use noma aze pring Uze reduced perting 0K cance C Deta io Use normal size printing Print without reducing the page Use reduced printing Reduce the page slightly during printing Specify the side to be stapled The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best Staple S
278. rom getting dirty CD R Tray Jammed Pull out the CD R Tray gently If the CD R Tray cannot be pulled out turn the printer off then turn the printer back on again The CD R Tray will automatically be ejected When the CD R Tray is pulled out place the CD R Tray G is on the upper side again then retry printing Place the DVD CD properly Attaching Removing the CD R Tray If the CD R Tray is still jammed check if there is a problem with the DVD CD gt CD R Tray Does Not Feed Properly Page top Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 319 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device s gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page top Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 320 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device About PictBridge Print Settings Page top Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 321 of 437 pages NVelifiejesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Dir
279. rom the Setup CD ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled To install My Printer select My Printer in Custom Install To start My Printer from the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Canon Utilities My Printer then My Printer m Easy WebPrint EX Easy WebPrint EX provides quick and easy printing of web pages for Internet Explorer You can print web pages automatically resized to fit the paper width without cutting off the sides of pages or preview and select the desired web pages to print Easy WebPrint EX is not available in Windows 2000 and Macintosh gt Important It is unlawful to reproduce or edit the copyrighted work of another person without permission from the copyright holder except for personal use use within the home or other use within the limited scope as defined by the copyright Additionally reproducing or editing photographs of people may infringe on portrait rights When Easy WebPrint EX is installed it adds a toolbar to your Internet Explorer screen The toolbar is available whenever Internet Explorer is running a e bran TE Pe Ohne The clip function for example allows you to clip desired parts of web pages and edit them to print Useful Software Applications Page 26 of 437 pages i Canos Cany WerPnnt eX iphis gt oer Or aero MOFT oe oe eee ee ae For details on printing web pages click we Help to view the online help Note Installing Easy
280. rvey To send the information automatically see Changing the confirmation screen setting e If you do not agree to participate in the survey program Click Do not agree The confirmation screen will be closed and the survey at that time is skipped The confirmation screen will be displayed again three months later e To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program click Uninstall then follow the on screen instructions e Changing the confirmation screen setting 1 Select items the Start menu as shown below In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Uninstall a program In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs Message Appears on the Computer Screen E8 Note In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting up software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task If you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue 2 Select Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program 3 Select Change If you select Yes after you have followed the on screen instructions the confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey
281. s checkbox to use the same image in all the frames on the page You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Selecting a Photo Page 139 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Selecting a Photo E Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Select roges for stickers You Can ako addfreplace rages Bater N the eating crocess To comect or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button Apoly corrections anc enhancements in the resuting screen a CRES E Sor by Date a A Inside Pages 0 mmagels 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import to Inside Pages The selected image s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area ES Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click tal Delete
282. s follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Photo Noise Reduction Check the Photo Noise Reduction check box on the Effects tab and select Normal or Strong for the level 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with the digital camera noise being reduced E8 Note It is recommended to select Normal for most cases Select Strong if you have selected Normal and the noise still bothers you Reducing Photo Noise Page 295 of 437 pages Depending on application software or resolution of image data effects of digital camera noise reduction may not be obvious When this function is used for other than photos taken by digital cameras image may be distorted Page top Overview of the Printer Driver Page 296 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Operations s gt Canon lJ Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon lJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Preview Page top Printer Driver Operations Canon Printer Driver Operations MA 5668 V 1 00 Page 297 of 437 pages a m Instructions for Use Printer Driver How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a
283. s what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout print order and number of pages You can also change the media type and paper source settings When you want to display a preview before printing open the printer driver setup window click the Quick Setup tab or the Main tab and check the Preview before printing check box When you do not want to display a preview before printing uncheck the check box Related Topic gt Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page top Printing on DVD CDs Page 303 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs Printing on DVD CDs Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Troubleshooting Page top Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Page 304 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Items to Prepare s gt Cautions When Printing on DVD CDs s gt Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer s gt Printing Area Page top Items to Prepare Page 305 of 437 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Printing on the Label Side of DVD CDs gt Items to Prepare Items to Prepare The
284. sed in This Document Page 99 of 437 pages AeFilese aid Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Symbols Used in This Document Symbols Used in This Document Warning Instructions that if ignored could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation Caution Instructions that if ignored could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation gt Important Instructions including important information Be sure to read these indications ES Note Instructions as notes for operation or additional explanations Indicates operations in Windows acintosh Indicates operations in Macintosh Page top Trademarks Page 100 of 437 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Trademarks Trademarks e Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation e Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Internet Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Macintosh and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e Bonjo
285. sition 3 Remove the ink tank with the lamp flashing fast Push the tab B and lift the ink tank to remove Do no touch the Print Head Lock Lever C gt Important Handle the ink tank carefully to avoid staining of clothing or the surrounding area Discard the empty ink tank according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables E8 Note Do not remove two or more ink tanks at the same time Be sure to replace ink tanks one by one Page 44 of 437 pages Replacing an Ink Tank when replacing two or more ink tanks For details on ink lamp flashing speed see Checking the Ink Status 4 Prepare the new ink tank 1 Take a new ink tank out of its package pull the orange tape in the direction of the arrow to peel it off then remove the film 0 gt Important Make sure that the film is completely removed from the air hole D If the air hole is blocked with the remaining film ink may leak out or may not eject properly 2 Hold the orange protective cap E as indicated in the figure below then twist and remove it from the bottom of the ink tank Remove the protective cap while holding it to prevent the ink from staining your fingers Discard the protective cap once it is removed gt Important Do not touch the electrical contacts F on the ink tank It can cause the printer to malfunction or become unable to print gt Important If you shake the ink ta
286. soby ate ING0012_sJ090 1MG0009_sJo9 G0002_sic 9 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import to Inside Pages The selected image s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area ES Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click tal Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click a Delete All Imported Images Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Editing Page 132 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Editing Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ede calendar as needed Insert taxt add rages of change Gyout Toa Na 2 ele mp BS lt gt a Basa General Toos A wy X 39 A ote y Mon Ostrbute 2 Edit the calendar if necessary s gt Changing Layout Changing Background gt Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos b Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos
287. source you selected in 3 of step 4 2 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The printer starts cleaning The cleaning will be completed after the paper is ejected Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the Paper Feed Roller Note f the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Roller in the Rear Tray follow the procedure below 1 Turn off the power and unplug the power cord 2 Rotate and clean the Paper Feed Roller A located in the center inside the Rear Tray with the moistened cotton swab or the like in the direction of the arrow B Do not touch the Paper Feed Roller with your fingers Be sure to use the cotton swab or the like to rotate the roller Page 72 of 437 pages Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Page 73 of 437 pages If the problem is still not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Roller as described above contact the service center O A Page top Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette Page 74 of 437 pages bie Guide E w Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette If the Pad in the Cassette is smeared with paper powder or dirt two or more sheets of paper may be ejected Follow the procedure below to clean the Pad in the Cassette You need to prepare cotton swab 1 Pull out the Cassette from the printer and remove all the papers 2 Clean the Pad A sideways with
288. specify the function settings on the application software When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with both the application and this printer driver the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable when Booklet is selected for Page Layout Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Poster is selected for Page Layout Note By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate you can perform printing so that papers are collated one by one starting from the last page These settings can be used in combination with Borderless Normal size Fit to Page Scaled Page Layout and Duplex Printing Page top Setting the Stapling Margin Page 228 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting the Stapling Margin Setting the Stapling Margin The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Specify the side to be stapled Check the position of the stapling margin from Staple Side on the Page Setup tab The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best staple position When you want to change the setting select from the list
289. stalled in the wrong position or it is empty Make sure that the ink tank is installed in the correct position as indicated by the label on the Print Head Holder If the position is correct but the lamp flashes the ink tank is empty Replace it with a new one Ink lamp is off The ink tank is not installed properly or the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled If the ink tank is not installed properly press the mark Push on the ink tank until the ink tank clicks into place If it does not click into place make sure that the orange protective cap has been removed from the bottom of the ink tank If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled replace the ink tank with a new Checking the Ink Status Page 49 of 437 pages Coe Replacing Procedure If the ink lamp is still off after reinstalling the ink tank there has been an error and the printer cannot print Check the Alarm lamp on the printer Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide With the Computer Screen You can confirm the status of each ink tank with the printer status monitor Windows or the Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Co a En Qion teh Ort tto it Level informer ia brew euee lt be o nyema ew A ae rh tte oan rae A J Petra egn wt Dain Fort Goan Te E Press the Abot iek benon to wew Me ielformarioa adost the ink tank Presi the Upedetej bation Ip check the
290. starts flashing green Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 1 minute 30 seconds E8 Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before cleaning the Print Head Pret Ha Cherry lee rhea ped eet rete Zetec he target rk gran tor caang P you area man d he mk grap ir aang m ose emra mame re Gasa J cce C emi eck te 4 4 5 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern 6 Examine the nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern E9 Note f the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice clean the Print Head deeply See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply If you click Cleaning on the Pattern Check dialog box that appears after printing the nozzle check pattern See When cleaning is required the printer starts cleaning the Print Head Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized paper are loaded in the Cassette then go to 3 in step 5 Page 59 of 437 pages Cleaning the Print Head Page 60 of 437 pages 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and ext
291. sults Not Satisfactory gt Back of the Paper Is Smudged Back of the Paper Is Smudged e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the printer Cleaning Inside the Printer ES Note When performing borderless printing duplex printing or too much printing the inside may become stained with ink Page top Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Page 377 of 437 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper type and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Is the size of the loaded paper correct The vertical lines may be printed in the margin if the size of the loaded paper is larger than that specified in the printer driver Set the paper size correctly according to the paper you loaded s gt Print Results Not Satisfactory ES Note The direction of the vertical line pattern may vary depending on the image data or the print setting This printer performs automatic cleaning when necessary to keep printouts clean A small amount of ink is ejected for cleaning Although ink is usually ejected on the ink absorber it may be ejected on the paper if
292. sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized paper are loaded in the Cassette then go to 3 in step 5 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important if the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Windows 5 Clean the Print Head 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Cleaning Cleaning the Print Head m Cone EOW seven Wretng Ainmean SSS SS lt E n Bonon Pate Desv Dram rve ruou rdre n Mavera ror muden oag prere Jf an mat Desg Ouan For Dearg kong reste g orrot he mere eed a a roe gt por here fil Ernim r ro arent ameme fp Tore be ree Am foem Ga A yo tt she rw satire Dat Mode T vay ais wh ater aam uara Moma you 13 asac peaton astom vee ire ete pane ams CE Ca x 3 Select the ink group to clean E8 Note This printer has two kinds of black ink PGBK pigment ink and BK dye ink Check the nozzle check pattern then click Black if there are missing lines in PGBK or click Color if there are horizontal white streaks in BK For details on the nozzle check pattern see Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 4 Click Execute The printer starts cleaning the Print Head when the Power lamp
293. t Cover Q 1 Inside Pages 0 rrape s Back Cover 0 1 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures P important f Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from another application MP Navigator EX or ZoomBrowser EX the folder tree area will not be displayed The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails 3 Select the image s you want to print and click one of the buttons below To print on the front cover click w Import to Front Cover To print on the inside pages click ke Import to Inside Pages To print on the back cover click Import to Back Cover The selected image s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area ES Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click Delete Imported Image Selecting a Photo Page 120 of 437 pages To delete all images from the selected image area click i Delete All Imported Images EA Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Editing Page 121 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Editing rl Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit sc
294. t EMF spooling such as Adobe Photoshop LE and MS Photo Editor the following functions will not operate e Preview before printing on the Main tab e Prevent loss of print data in the Print Options dialog box e Page Layout Poster Booklet Duplex Printing manually Specify Margin Print from Last Page Collate and Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab e Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution text and lines in the preview display may appear different from the actual print result e With some applications the printing is divided into multiple print jobs To cancel printing delete all divided print jobs e If image data is not printed correctly display the Print Options dialog box from the Page Setup tab and change the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software This may solve the problem e Software windows may not appear correctly on Windows Vista when fonts are set to Larger scale When you want to display the windows with Larger scale fonts set the desktop theme to Windows Classic as follows 1 Select Control Panel from the Start menu 2 Select Appearance and Personalization gt Personalization gt Theme The Theme Settings dialog box opens 3 At the Theme Settings dialog box click the Themes tab and select Windows Classic from Theme 4 Click OK Desktop changes to Windows Classic display Points to Note with Applications e There are followin
295. t Head may overheat To protect the Print Head the printer may stop printing at a line break for a period of time and then resume printing In this case interrupt your print session at a convenient time and turn the printer off for at least 15 minutes Additionally if the printer has been printing graphics or photos with intense colors continuously over a period of time the printer may stop printing to protect the Print Head In this case printing will not resume automatically Turn the printer off for at least 15 minutes Caution The Print Head and the surrounding area can become extremely hot inside the printer Never touch the Print Head or nearby components e Check 3 Is the paper loaded Make sure that paper is loaded in the Rear Tray or Cassette Confirm the paper source then reload paper e Check 4 Do the printing documents have lots of photographs or illustrations Printing large data such as photos or graphics takes time for the printer and the computer to process during which the printer may appear to have stopped operating In addition when printing data that uses a large amount of ink continuously on plain paper the printer may pause temporarily In either case wait until the process is complete ES Note If you are printing a document with a large printing area or printing multiple copies of a document printing may pause to allow the ink to dry Page top Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected
296. t file el5 CD LabelPrint data cld 3 Edit the file if necessary ES Note Opening Saved Files Page 220 of 437 pages See the following sections for details on the editing procedures Editing Album Editing Calendar s gt Editing Stickers gt Editing Layout Print EA Note You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX with the following methods besides from Library in Menu Double click or click the file From the File menu click Open then select the file you want to edit You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu Page top Printing with Other Application Software Page 221 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods s gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Overview of the Printer Driver Page top Various Printing Methods Page 222 of 437 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods Various Printing Methods s gt Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation s gt Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order s gt Setting the Stapling Margin gt Borderless Printing s gt Fit to Page Printing gt Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing
297. t of paper When the printing of one side is complete load the paper correctly by following the message and click OK The document will be printed on the opposite side P important Duplex Printing appears grayed out and is unavailable when A media type other than Plain Paper Hagaki A or Hagaki is selected from the Media Type list Poster is selected from the Page Layout list When Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list Duplex Printing and Staple Side appear grayed out and are unavailable After printing the front page there is an ink drying wait time before starting to print the back page Operation stops temporarily Do not touch the paper during the time You can change the ink drying wait time at Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab When you perform the automatic duplex printing for Hagaki print an address first and then print your message Note When you select borderless printing during duplex printing a dialog box for media type selection may appear If that happens select Plain Paper When performing the automatic duplex printing do not use any plain paper smaller than A5 Also do not select any type of paper other than Plain Paper Hagaki A or Hagaki at Media Type If the back side of the paper becomes smudged during duplex printing perform Bottom Plate Cleaning in the Maintenance tab Related Topic Cleaning Inside the Printer Page top Stamp Background Printing Page 248 of 437 pages AdvancedG
298. t settings as necessary 3 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 4 Execute print Printing This Manual Page 94 of 437 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents are printed P important A large amount of paper is necessary to print all documents Before printing be sure to check the number of print pages displayed in the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box The Print Preview dialog box allows you to scale the printing to the paper width or to set the zoom rate However if the print data extends outside the paper because of the new zoom rate that portion of the document will not be printed on the paper Page top Using Keywords to Find a Document Page 95 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Using Keywords to Find a Document Using Keywords to Find a Document You can enter a keyword to search for a target document All documents in the currently displayed on screen manual are searched senes Sat Searching en Meres Advanced Gide E Using the Red Eye Corecton Function Documents Containing Any Keyword 2 Man Componerts L Parting Photos Easy PhoatoPart EX D Using Vanus Functions of Easy Photo Part _ Parting Docurnerts Windows L Prrting Documerts Macrtosh L Useful Software Anphcatons _ Meda Types You Can Use D Repiscing an ink Tank L When Printing Becomes
299. t the Printer and Media Type according to the printer and DVD CD to be used Exif Print ES Note When CD R is selected only Disc tray will be selectable for Paper Source 2 Click Layout Print The Layout Print screen appears Printing on a DVD CD Page 182 of 437 pages Select the layout you want to pret Check the Preview and dc the Print bution Exif Print Fooed x16 Random 3 Select a layout you want to use 4 Enter the title s and specify the details of the layout in Advanced E8 Note Items that can be set may vary depending on the selected layout 5 Click Print Set a DVD CD and print according to the message Printing starts from the top of the image displayed in Preview E8 Note a You can adjust the printing position on the DVD CD in the Adjust dialog box To display the Adjust dialog box click Adjust Print Area Print Position You can specify advanced Photo Print settings number of copies print quality etc in the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ott Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Page top Printing Vivid Photos Page 183 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Vivid Photos Printing Vivid Photos Select the Vivid Photo checkbox in the Select
300. ta press the Alt key on your keyboard and then select Run as administrator gt Sharing from the displayed File menu e In Windows XP or Windows 2000 select Sharing from the File menu P important In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning E8 Note Windows XP may display a message recommending the user to use the Network Setup Wizard to set up sharing When this message appears choose not to use the wizard and then set up sharing Set sharing Select Share this printer Windows Vista Windows XP or Shared as Windows 2000 on the Sharing tab to set a shared name if necessary and click OK The setup on the print server system is complete Next set up the client systems O Page top Settings on Client PC Page 430 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Settings on Client PC Settings on Client PC After setting up the print server system set up the client system The procedure for setting up the client systems is as
301. te Continuous Autofeed or Paper Allocation that matches your purpose for Paper Source P important The paper source settings that can be selected may differ depending on the paper type and size 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document is printed with settings that matches your purpose P important When you check the Always Print with Current Settings check box all settings on the Quick Setup Main Page Setup and Effects tabs are saved and you can print with the same settings from the next time as well Printing with Easy Setup Page 224 of 437 pages Click Save to register the specified settings For instructions on registering settings see Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page top Setting a Page Size and Orientation Page 225 of 437 pages AdvancedGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting a Page Size and Orientation The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application When the page size and orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the application you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab When you are not able to specify them with the application the procedure for selecting a page size and orientation is as follows You can
302. tep 1 in Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern If a particular color is not printed properly replace the ink tank of that color See Replacing an Ink Tank If the problem is not resolved open the Top Cover to confirm that the ink is remaining turn off the power then clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 65 of 437 pages If the problem is still not resolved the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center O A Page top Aligning the Print Head Page 66 of 437 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Aligning the Print Head m Aligning the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory adjust the print head position You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized supplied paper or Canon Matte Photo Paper MP 101 E8 Note If the remaining ink level is low the print head alignment pattern will not be printed correctly Replace the ink tank whose ink is low See Replacing an Ink Tank The print head alignment pattern is printed in black and blue if you run out of supplied paper Canon Matte Photo Paper MP 101 or Canon genuine paper is not immediately available or obtainable you can use plain paper and align the Print Head manually Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Aligning the Print Head without a computer You can
303. ter printing is complete Poster Printing Page 241 of 437 pages 4 Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed If necessary click Specify specify the following settings in the Poster Printing dialog box and then click OK _ Poster Printing mesa kage Dysors Ded eto 42x 2 i T pirt Ct Paste in margins J Port Cit Paste ines in margins Print page range a Pages Erter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3512 0K cen otas te Image Divisions Select the number of divisions vertical x horizontal As the number of divisions increases the number of sheets used for printing increases allowing you to create a larger poster Print Cut Paste in margins To leave out words Cut and Paste uncheck this check box P important This feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used Print Cut Paste lines in margins To leave out cut lines uncheck this check box Pages To reprint only specific pages enter the page number you want to print To print multiple pages specify by separating the pages with commas or entering a hyphen between the page numbers E9 Note You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the settings preview 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document will be divided into several pages during printing After all poster pages have been printed past
304. th ICC Profiles Describes the procedure for printing by using the color space of Adobe RGB or sRGB effectively You can print with a common color space by setting up the application software and the printer driver so that the color management matches the input ICC profile of the image data The method for setting up the printer driver differs depending on the application software to be used O Page top Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 272 of 437 pages AJS Gites Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print SRGB data with color tints that most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color When printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them use a printing ICC profile in the application software and select settings for color management The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the printer from the Media Type list on the Main tab DR ak Sep D Man 23 Page Setup of Etects Al Martenance Meda Type Plan Facer
305. the Inner Cover place the CD R Tray properly then press the RESUME CANCEL button For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Page top Cannot Print on DVD CDs Page 317 of 437 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing on DVD CDs gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Print on DVD CDs Cannot Print on DVD CDs s gt DVD CD Printing Does Not Start gt CD R Tray Does Not Feed Properly s gt CD R Tray Jammed DVD CD Printing Does Not Start e Check 1 Is the CD R Tray placed properly Open the Inner Cover properly place the CD R Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Use the CD R Tray supplied with this printer G is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray e Check 2 Is the DVD CD placed on the CD R Tray Place the DVD CD on the CD R Tray properly then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Make sure that you are using the CD R Tray supplied with the printer G is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray e Check 3 If DVD CD printing stops before it is complete try the operation again If a certain period of time has elapsed while DVD CD printing is in progress the printer stops initializing If you press the RESUME CANCEL button the printer resumes initializing Try the operation again following the on screen instructions CD R Tray D
306. the Transport Unit Page 392 of 437 pages 4 6 If any paper is sticking out of the Cassette remove the paper align and reload the paper in the Cassette If you did not remove the jammed paper out in step 1 to 5 when automatic duplex printing check the duplex transport section gt Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing Ee Note When reloading the paper into the printer confirm that you are using the correct paper and are loading it into the printer correctly gt Loading Paper 7 Insert the Cassette into the printer again and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer If you turned off the printer in step 2 all print jobs in queue are canceled Reprint if necessary If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the printer or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper contact the service center Page top Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing Page 393 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams gt Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing Before removing the jammed paper see Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit to remove it from Transport Unit If the paper jam error continues remove the jammed paper following the procedure below 1 Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord of
307. the arrow indicates See your printer manual for details on how to load paper to print on the front back etc Page top How Do I Print with Even Margins Page 178 of 437 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt How Do I Print with Even Margins Easy PhotoPrint EX Se How Do I Print with Even Margins When you print on a bordered layout the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other depending on the image and printer To always print with even margins select the Always crop images when selecting a layout with margins checkbox on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ott Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Crop the photo to apply even margins individually Cropping Photos Photo Print E Note This setting is available for Photo Print only Page top What Is C1 or C4 Page 179 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt What Is C1 or C4 al What Is C1 or C4 When an album is printed labels such as C1 and C4 are printed as page numbers The C1 and C4 represent the front cover and back cover respectively C1 Front cover
308. the halftones Dither arranges the dots according to fixed rules to express the halftones Diffusion places the dots randomly to express the halftones When you select Auto the data is printed with the optimal halftoning method for the selected print quality 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified quality level and halftoning method P important Certain print quality levels and halftoning methods cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type ES Note When the part of the object is not printed selecting Diffusion for Halftoning may solve the problem Related Topics Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity m Adjusting Contrast Page top Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 267 of 437 pages Adna aid Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Printing a Color Document in Monochrome The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set grayscale printing Check the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab Plan Paper Ago
309. the network O Page top Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page 432 of 437 pages Nelifirjecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Restrictions on Printer Sharing Restrictions on Printer Sharing These are restrictions that apply when you are using a printer in a network environment Check the restrictions for the environment you are using When You Are Sharing a Printer in a Network e A print completion message may be displayed To disable the message display follow the procedure below e In Windows Vista Press the Alt key from the Printers window on the client system Open Run as administrator gt Server Properties from the displayed File menu Uncheck Show informational notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e In Windows XP or Windows 2000 Open Server Properties from the File menu of the Printer and Faxes window Windows XP or the Printers window Windows 2000 on the print server system Uncheck Notify when remote documents are printed on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e The bi directional communication function is disabled and the correct printer status may not be recognized When a client user opens the printer driver properties and then clicks OK with the Enable bidirectional support check box on the Ports tab unchecked the bi directional function of the printer server system may also be disabled
310. tions Routine Maintenance The ink absorber is almost full Press the printer s RESUME CANCEL button to continue printing Contact the service center e Check the device connected to the printer Printing photos directly is possible only with a PictBridge compliant device e Acommunication time out occurs if an operation takes too long or if it takes too much time to send data This may cancel printing In such cases disconnect and reconnect the USB cable When printing from a PictBridge compliant device depending on the model or brand of your device you may have to select a PictBridge compliant print mode on the device before connecting it to the printer You may also have to turn on your device or select Play mode manually after connecting the device to the printer Perform necessary operations before connecting your device referring to its instruction manual If the error is still not resolved check if you can print another photograph The size of paper may not be compatible with automatic duplex printing The sizes of media suitable for auto duplex printing are A4 Letter A5 and 5 x 7 Make sure that the size of the paper loaded in the printer is correct Pressing the RESUME CANCEL button will eject the paper and restart printing from the front side of the next paper The reverse side of the ejected sheet will not be printed e Print Head nozzles are clogged Press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error and pr
311. tly off the paper Without the borderless printing function a margin is provided around the printed data When you want to print data such as a photo without providing any margin around it select borderless printing The procedure for performing borderless printing is as follows You can also set borderless printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab Setting Borderless Printing 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set borderless printing Select Borderless from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab Canca iP4700 series Printing Preferences TR ak Setup E Main 23 Page Setup of Etects A Martenance El Page Sze Leter 3 5711 E Onentation Al Pora A Langscape a Aetate 180 dogroee Page Layout Borderless eqn aa E H A Lemee 85x11 215 5273 dem Normal size FetoPoge Scaled Page Layout Click OK when the confirmation message appears When a message prompting you to change the media type appears select a media type from the list and click OK 3 Check the paper size Borderless Printing Page 231 of 437 pages Check the Page Size list When you want to change select another page size from the list The list displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing 4 Adjust the amount of extension from the paper If necessary adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider Moving the slider to the right makes the amount larger and moving
312. tomatically feeds paper from the cassette If not the printer feeds paper from the rear tray To change the paper allocation settings click Paper Allocation specify the Paper Size to be loaded in the cassette and then click OK When you load frequently used plain paper in the cassette the printer feeds paper from the rear tray when the print data uses a different type of paper You can therefore reduce the trouble of having to load different paper 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the printer uses the specified paper source to print the data Page top Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page 261 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Displaying the Print Results before Printing Displaying the Print Results before Printing You can display and check the print result before printing The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab mh Canon iP4700 series Print ng Preferences a x FR asp D Man E3 Page Setup of Efocts ff Martenance Meds Type Plan Paper Li Paper Source Actomatcally Select di Print Quaity Hh aged Bos Lee
313. top Other Settings Page 197 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings Other Settings s gt Changing Layout s gt Changing Background m Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Framing Photos s Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving s gt Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files Page top Changing Layout Page 198 of 437 pages Aana Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Layout Easy PhotoPrint EX Se Changing Layout You can change the layout of each page separately Select the page you want to change the layout of in the Edit screen then click Es Change Layout Select the layout you want to use in the Change Layout dialog box and click OK Album Edit Took Belja EHe E Applyto all pages aleae DE P important f the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout the following will happen If the number of layout Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames frames is increased in the new layout If the number of layout Pages wit
314. tos Photo Print Page 185 of 437 pages Adans tiffs Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Cropping Photos Photo Print Eor EX Cropping Photos Photo Print Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the necessary portions Click j Crop Image in the Layout Print screen or double click the preview image F The Rule of Thad Move the white frame to the portion to print and click OK ES Note To move the cropping area place the cursor within the white frame and drag it Drag the white lines to enlarge reduce the cropping area Select the The Rule of Thirds checkbox to display white broken lines To create a balanced composition drag any of the intersecting points white squares or white broken lines over the main subject of the photo Cropping Photos Photo Print Page 186 of 437 pages The cropping effect applies only to the print result The original image will not be cropped See Help for details on the Crop window Page top Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Page 187 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Easy PhotoPrint EX Se Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print To print the date the ph
315. ts printing automatically No paper Load paper and select Continue in the display on your PictBridge compliant device To resume printing you can also press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer instead of selecting Continue on the device Paper Error If the Paper Output Tray is closed open it The printer resumes printing If the Inner Cover is opened close it and select Stop in the display on your PictBridge compliant device to stop printing Paper jam Select Stop in the display on your PictBridge compliant device to stop printing Remove the jammed paper load new paper press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer then try printing again Printer cover open Close the Top Cover on the printer No print head The Print Head is defective or is not installed See Five flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action Waste tank full Ink absorber full The ink absorber is nearly full See Eight flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action No ink Ink cassette error The ink tank is not installed properly or empty Check the number of how many the Alarm lamp flashes and take the appropriate action to resolve the error Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Ink Error An ink tank that was once empty is installed See Thirteen flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action Hardware Error Ink tank errors have occurred Replace the ink tank Ro
316. ttach the CD R Tray until the message asking you to load the DVD CD is displayed Doing so can damage the printer 1 Open the Paper Output Tray A 2 Make sure that the message asking you to load the DVD CD is displayed then open the Inner Cover B A B 3 Place the DVD CD on the CD R Tray P important Make sure that there is no dirt on the CD R Tray before placing a DVD CD on the CD R Tray When placing a DVD CD on the CD R Tray do not touch the printing surface of the disc or the reflectors C on the CD R Tray e 12cm DVD CD 1 Place the disc on the CD R Tray with the printable surface facing up e 8 cm DVD CD 1 Align the protrusions on both edges of the 8 cm CD R Adapter with indentations on Page 307 of 437 pages Attaching Removing the CD R Tray Page 308 of 437 pages the CD R Tray 2 Place the 8 cm disc on the CD R Tray with the printing surface facing up 4 Attach the CD R Tray to the printer ES Note The CD R Tray may be ejected after a specified period of time has elapsed In this case follow the on screen instructions to attach the CD R Tray 5 Insert the CD R Tray straight until the arrow gt on the Inner Cover is almost aligned with the arrow 3 on the CD R Tray D D Keep the CD R Tray level when inserting it E Align the arrow 1 on the CD R Tray with the arrow gt on the Inner Cover P important Do not insert the CD R Tray beyond the arrow D
317. tte Maximum size 8 50 x 26 61 inches 215 9 x 676 0 mm Rear Tray 8 50 x 11 69 inches 215 9 x 297 0 mm Cassette Paper Weight 17 to 28 Ib 64 to 105 g m2 except for Canon genuine paper Do not use heavier or lighter paper except for Canon genuine paper as it could jam in the printer Notes on Storing Paper Take out only the necessary number of paper from the package just before printing To avoid curling when you do not print put unused paper back into the package and keep it ona level surface And also store it avoiding heat humidity and direct sunlight Notes on Paper for Full page Borderless Printing You cannot use A5 B5 and Legal sized paper and envelopes for full page borderless printing You can use plain paper for full page borderless printing However this may result in lower print quality We recommend using plain paper for a trial print O A Page top Media Types You Cannot Use Page 41 of 437 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Media Types You Cannot Use m Media Types You Cannot Use Do not use the following types of paper Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results but also the printer to jam or malfunction Folded curled or wrinkled paper Damp paper Paper that is too thin weighing less than 17 Ib 64 g m 2 Paper that is too thick weighing more than 28 Ib 105 g m 2 except for Canon genuine paper
318. ttings gt Adding Photos Gal Eror Adding Photos You can add images to pages Select the page you want to add photos in the Edit screen then click E Add Image EA Note a The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions The screens may vary depending on what you create D mG0001_s429 Edit Tools Bee MAn Oe Ee 7 DH L M Gnnn inn MANNII lt 9 MANNI inn aaae Sine soe DE Select the folder containing the image you want to add from the folder tree area on the left of the Add Image dialog box and select the image you want to add from the thumbnail window on the right EA Note Click an image to select it background turns blue or deselect it background turns white You can also select multiple images Select an option for Add to and click OK P important You can add up to 20 images at one time to a single page Up to 99 of the same images can be added to all pages combined You cannot add two or more of the same image at one time Add it one at a time When the number of pages increases due to added images you cannot add images beyond page 400 E Note Inthe Add Image dialog box you can select all images at one time or change the display size and order of the thumbnails See Help for details Page top Swapping Positions of Photos Page 204 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Pri
319. ty Macintosh 5 Print the nozzle check pattern 1 Select Test Print in the pop up menu 2 Click Nozzle Check Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern 1 Prints panera thar lene yos chech whether print head maces are Clogged Port Head Abyrvreerrt Sxecutes pring head algrenere to carnect the mialignevert of cobers and lines on 3 Confirm the displayed message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern EE Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before printing the nozzle check pattern 6 Examine the nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 9 A Page top Page 55 of 437 pages Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 56 of 437 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern m Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Examine the nozzle check pattern and clean the Print Head if necessary 1 Check if there are missing lines in the pattern 1 or horizontal white streaks in the pattern 2 tallest Ahmet n ee ee eee ee ee eee eee n Tmar i If there are missing lines in the pattern 1 Clean the print head nozzles of the Black ink group PGBK A Good B Bad Lines are missing
320. ty Level and a Halftoning Method s gt Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity s gt Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Color Balance Page 278 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance You can adjust the color tints when printing Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color it changes the total color balance of the document Use the application software if you want to change the color balance significantly Use the printer driver only when you want to adjust the color balance slightly The following sample shows the case when color balance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish yellow so that the overall colors are more uniform No adjustment Adjust Color Balance The procedure for adjusting color balance is as follows You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set Rasas Man 53 Page Setup of Blects ff Martenance
321. ty of layouts Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Changing Layout m Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos s gt Printing Dates on Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving s gt Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 144 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Selact the Kem you want to create from the meny Selact LOrecy to access saved tems Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 145 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Layout Print from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Soecty paper sze etc m General Settings then select a b
322. u need to do is select which photos to use select a layout then load paper into your printer and print After you bind the printed sheets you ll have the one and only album of your memories You can change the layout and background and attach comments to photos You can arrange a photo across the left and right pages You can also select the size and orientation CHECK ssdrsewsssnecas Select a theme background design to create a single themed album Decorate Items with Text and Frames You can add text and frames to photos Attach a description of the photo in an album and add a frame to enhance the photo s atmosphere Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 434 of 437 pages eH HH H A l U M M U r CHECK Select Album to add text and frames You cannot decorate photos with Photo Print Create a Calendar Using Your Favorite Photos Create calendars easily with Easy PhotoPrint EX Create your own calendar using your favorite photos It ll be exciting to turn the calendar pages You can also create 2 month 6 month and 12 month You can use all kinds of photos calendars Create Stickers Create stickers easily with Easy PhotoPrint EX Create stickers of your favorite photos and share them with your friends CHECK You can add text to photos Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 435 of 437 pages Page top About Solution Menu Page 436 of 437 pages
323. uide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing Stamp Background Printing This feature is unavailable when the 64 bit printer driver is used The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data It also allows you to print date time and user name The Background function allows you to print a light illustration behind the document data The procedure for performing stamp background printing Printing a Stamp CONFIDENTIAL IMPORTANT and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre registered 1 Open the printer driver setup window is as follows 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab 470 E ask Senp E Man B Page Setup gf Eocts AJ Martenance Page Lagat Noenalsine a 8 El Page Sze Letter 85x11 l li amp Onertation A Pora A unce 2 Rotate 180 degrees a Sane os Page Sre a a Scaled Page Layout Pig Paper Letar 85 11 215 2273 den Nomas Bordetess Ftiofope 1 Oupleg Parting Automatic Staple Sde Long side saping Leh 1 gt 1 993 hp At Part tom Last Page 3 Select a stamp Check the Stamp check box and select a desired stamp from the list Stamp Background Printing Page 249 of 437 pages The current settings are dis
324. until it clicks into place Check 5 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the printer and the computer then check the followings e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the printer directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again Check 6 Restart your computer if you are printing from the computer If there are any unnecessary print jobs delete them Deleting the Undesired Print Job Check 7 Make sure that the Inner Cover is closed If the Inner Cover is opened close the Inner Cover and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Check 8 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in the Print dialog box The printer will not print properly if you are using a driver for a different printer In Windows make sure that your printer s name is selected in the Print dialog box In Macintosh make sure that your printer s name is selected in Printer in the Print dialog box Printing Does Not Start Page 381 of 437 pages ES Note To make the printer the one selected by default select Set as Default Printer Windows Default Printer or Make Default Macintosh Windows e Check 9 Configure the printer port appropriately Configure USBnnn
325. ur is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e Adobe Adobe Photoshop Adobe RGB and Adobe RGB 1998 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Exif Print This printer supports Exif Print Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers By connecting to an Exif Print compliant digital camera the camera s image data at the time of shooting is used and optimized yielding extremely high quality prints Page top Printing from a Computer Page 101 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer Printing from a Computer Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Page top Printing with the Bundled Application Software Page 102 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with the Bundled Application Software s gt What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX s gt Printing Photos Creating an Album gt Printing a DVD CD s gt Printing Calendars s Printing Stickers s Printing Layout s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Questions and Answers Photo Print Settings Other Settings Page top What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 103 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from
326. ures 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import to Inside Pages The selected image s are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area ES Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click tal Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click a Delete All Imported Images Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Editing Page 147 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Editing Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears t print elements as needed at add images or change yout 3 N Edit the layout if necessary gt Changing Layout Adding Photos gt Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos gt Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited layout It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again s gt Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Printing Page 148 of 437 pages Adva
327. ute print the image is printed with the adjusted contrast Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance gt Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Page top Simulating an Illustration Page 286 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Simulating an Illustration Simulating an Illustration With the Simulate Illustration function you can print full color or 256 color image data so that it looks like a hand drawn illustration This function adds different effects to the original profile and colors The procedure for performing Simulate Illustration is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the Simulate Illustration If necessary check the Simulate Illustration check box on the Effects tab and adjust the Contrast Moving the slider to the right lightens the image data and moving the slider to the left darkens the image data The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed so that it looks hand drawn Page top Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 287 of 437 pages Advanced Gmide
328. utine Maintenance Page top FAQs Page 405 of 437 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt FAQs FAQs No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected s Cannot Install the Printer Driver gt Printing Does Not Start Printing Stops Before It ls Completed gt Mie writing Error Output Error Communication Error Print Results Not Satisfactory Paper Jams Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page top If You Cannot Resolve the Problem Page 406 of 437 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter please contact the seller of the printer or the service center Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers Caution If the printer emits any unusual sound smoke or odor turn it off immediately Unplug the power cord from the outlet and contact the seller or the service center Never attempt to repair or disassemble the printer yourself Attempts by customers to repair or take apart the printer will invalidate any warranty regardless of whether the warranty has expired Before contacting the service center confirm the following e Product name Your printer s name is located on the front cover of the s
329. uto Photo Fix Also Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application digital camera etc manufactured by other companies 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears SE Auto Photo Fix fet RedEye Conection 22 Face Shapenet os Diza Face Smocthing En CA Users User Name IMGOXS sjpg EA Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 153 of 437 pages ES Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail does not appear below Preview 3 Make sure that Auto is selected 4 Click Auto Photo Fix then click OK The entire photo is corrected automatically and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image EA Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to app
330. ved File Easy PhotoPrint EX es Se 3 How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File If you want to move or copy a file created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX from one folder to another you need to move or copy the folder that was automatically created when originally saving that file as well For example when you save a file named MyAlbum el1 a folder named MyAlbum el1 Data is automatically created in the same folder that contains the MyAlbum el1 file If you want to move or copy the MyAlbum el1 file to another folder move or copy the MyAlbum el1 Data folder as well The MyAlbum el1 Data folder contains the photos used in the album MyAlbum ell S Data MyAlbum ell E8 Note The icons may vary depending on the items P important Do not change the Data folder name otherwise you will not be able to display the photos you edited with Easy PhotoPrint EX Page top Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from Page 177 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from Easy PhotoPrint EX Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from As shown below printing starts from the left side of the image displayed in the Layout Print screen Outputs the paper in the direction as
331. want to learn about F AGescripton of the item ts displayed Related Topic How to Oven the Printer Driver Setuo Window When you click a document title displayed in the contents pane found to the left of the on screen manual the documents of that title are displayed in the explanation window on the right side When you click found to the left of eS the document titles found in the lower hierarchies are displayed Note Click amp Set to close or display the contents pane Page top Operating the Explanation Window Page 90 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Operating the Explanation Window Operating the Explanation Window E Cance ries On screen Manwal dax p U Contents S My Manual P Seach E Print gt l Advanced Guide Advanced Guide How to Use This Manual How to Use This Manual Operaang the Expt Printing This Manual Using Keywords to Find a Document Registering Documents to My Manual Symbols Used in This Document Trademarks 1 Click the green characters to jump to the corresponding document 2 The cursor jumps to the top of this document Page top Printing This Manual Page 91 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Printing This Manual Printing This Manual Canon E series On screen Manual 4 Back p E Contents yy MyManual J gt Searcht g as Pret
332. where n is a number as the printer port 1 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege 2 Click Control Panel then Printer under Hardware and Sound In Windows XP click Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware then Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 click Control Panel then Printers 3 Right click the Canon XXX icon then select Properties 4 Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings Make sure that a port named USBnnn where n is a number with Canon XXX appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port s If the setting is incorrect reinstall the printer driver or change the printer port to the correct one e Check 10 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog Page top Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Page 382 of 437 pages Nelieirjecel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Printing Stops Before It Is Completed e Check 1 Is the Inner Cover opened while printing on paper Close the Inner Cover and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer A page of print data being sent at the time of the error will be erased so print that page again e Check 2 Has the printer been printing continuously for a long period If the printer has been printing continuously for a long time the Prin
333. ws Registering New Background 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab wT me ee Ren E ak Setup lt gt Main B Page Setup gf Etects Aj Martenance El Page Sze Letter 85 11 amp Onentation a O Porat A Lngcape Rotate 180 degrees a Same os Page Sze Page Layout Nomnalsire Sa E v Nommalsizne Bordsiess FetoPage Scaled Page Layout nt 5 Pert Area Setup Specty Marge 3 Click Select Background The Background Settings dialog box opens Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 255 of 437 pages Background Settings Not Saved Ea Background Save setings Select Fie Layout Method Fil poga g km Ftensty O Defats 4 Select the image data to be registered to the background Click Select File Select the target bitmap file bmp and then click Open 5 Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window Layout Method Select how the background image data is to be placed When Custom is selected you can set coordinates for X Position and Y Position You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window Intensity Set the intensity of the background image data with the Intensity slider To lighten the background move the slider to the left To darken the background
334. x cual gt Printing This Manual Document Selection Eert sera Select Target series Current Document vj D D On screen Manual Documents to Be Printed Current Document 2 Ganen series On screen Manu oon 2 TA Basic Guide Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Describes nmar tailed in t E Print piked documents Click P to display the print pane to the left of the on screen manual ES Note a Click to close or display the print pane When you click and then click Page Setup the Page Setup dialog box appears You can then easily set up the paper to be used for printing Click and then click Print Settings to display the Print dialog box When the dialog box is displayed select the printer to be used for printing The Print Setup tab also allows you to select the printer to be used After selecting the printer to be used click Properties to specify the print settings Click and then click Option Settings to display the Option Settings dialog box You can then set up the printing operation Print document title and page number When this check box is checked the manual name and the page number are printed in the header top of the document Print background color and images When this check box is checked the background color and the image are printed Some images are printed regardless of whether this check box is checked or not Check number of pages to be printed before p
335. y Printer Driver Related Topics b Before Installing the Printer Driver s Installing the Printer Driver Page top Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Page 417 of 437 pages Advanced Gumide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Driver gt Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver The printer driver you no longer use can be deleted When deleting the printer driver first exit all programs that are running The procedure to delete the unnecessary printer driver is as follows When There is an Uninstaller 1 Start the uninstaller e In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt All Programs gt Your model name gt Printer Driver Uninstaller e In Windows XP select the start menu gt All Programs gt Your model name gt Printer Driver Uninstaller e In Windows 2000 select the Start menu gt Programs gt Your model name gt Printer Driver Uninstaller The Printer Driver Uninstaller dialog box is displayed P important In Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Continue or Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator
336. y damage the printer If you want to continue printing in this condition you need to release the function for detecting the remaining ink level Press and hold the printer s RESUME CANCEL button for at least 5 seconds and then release it With this operation releasing the function for detecting the remaining ink level is memorized Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any printer malfunction or damage caused by refilled ink tanks Note If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled the ink tank is displayed in gray on the printer status monitor Windows and Canon lJ Printer Utility Macintosh Routine Maintenance The ink tank is not compatible with this printer The lamp on the ink tank is off Install an appropriate ink tank Routine Maintenance An ink tank error has occurred The lamp on the ink tank is off Replace the ink tank Routine Maintenance Ink has run out The lamp on the ink tank flashes Replace the ink tank and close the Top Cover Routine Maintenance Printing under the current condition may damage the printer If you want to continue printing in this condition you need to release the function for detecting the remaining ink level Press and hold the printer s RESUME CANCEL button for at least 5 seconds and then release it With this operation releasing the function for detecting the remaining ink level is memorized Please be advised that Canon
337. y supplied with the printer G is on the upper side For details on how to place the CD R Tray see Attaching Removing the CD R Tray e Check 3 Unrecognizable DVD CD may be placed Canon recommends that you use DVD CDs specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer e Check 4 Is the DVD CD on the CD R Tray already printed If you place a DVD CD on which has already been printed on the CD R Tray the CD R Tray may be ejected In this case change the settings of the printer driver and try printing again e Clear the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box in Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab then click Send When printing is over select the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box and click Send EA Note a If the Detects a printable disc in the CD R tray check box is cleared printing may start without the DVD CD loaded Selecting the check box prevents the CD R Tray from getting dirty e Check 5 Is the Inner Cover opened when starting printing on paper or while printing is in progress Close the Inner Cover then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Do not open or close the Inner Cover while printing is in progress This may damage the printer MTT message 1001 Is Displayed Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 316 of 437 pages e Check Place the CD R Tray properly Place the CD R Tray properly then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are us
338. you finish inputting the pattern number for column j then click Send Page top Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page 342 of 437 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Checking the Print Head Nozzles Checking the Print Head Nozzles The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print heads are working properly by printing a nozzle check pattern Print the pattern if printing becomes faint or if a specific color fails to print The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows Nozzle Check Open the printer driver setup window Click Nozzle Check on the Maintenance tab The Nozzle Check dialog box opens To display a list of items that you should check before printing the check pattern click Initial Check Items Load paper in the printer Load a sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the cassette Print a nozzle check pattern Make sure that the printer is on and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern is printed Click OK when the confirmation message appears The Pattern Check dialog box opens Check the print result Check the print result When the print result is normal click Exit If the print result is smudged or if there are any unprinted sections click Cleaning to clean the print head Related Topic s gt Cleaning the Print Heads Page top Cleaning Inside the Printer Page 343 of 437 pages
339. you load paper larger than that specified with the printer driver Page top Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 378 of 437 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Colors Are Uneven 000909999 OE EAK_ Colors Are Streaked e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings s Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e f the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly Check to see if a particular color s ink tank is not empty If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient perform the Print Head Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the printer and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice If Print Head
340. yout After spectying paper sae atc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Ste 47x67 10xiSen x Eert date Orentaton A Portrat AJ tandscape MEE ZASS 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Print date EA Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings 3 Select a layout from Layouts EA Note The layouts may vary depending on the Orientation EA Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Selecting a Photo Page 146 of 437 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Selact rrapes for layout printing You can aso add repace mages brer ni the eding process To correct or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button Agoly corrections and enhancements in the resuting screen a E soby ooe Inside Pages 0 mage s 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniat

Canon iP4700 series On-screen Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents